<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Paul.Spann</id>
	<title>Standout Property Manager Wiki Help - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Paul.Spann"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Paul.Spann"/>
	<updated>2026-09-11T16:32:55Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.17</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Telephone_Wizard&amp;diff=796</id>
		<title>Telephone Wizard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Telephone_Wizard&amp;diff=796"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Telephone_wizard]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Tasks&amp;diff=794</id>
		<title>Tasks</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Tasks&amp;diff=794"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Task_List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sales_Reports&amp;diff=792</id>
		<title>Sales Reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sales_Reports&amp;diff=792"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Reports_Centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sales_Property&amp;diff=790</id>
		<title>Sales Property</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sales_Property&amp;diff=790"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Property_Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Reports&amp;diff=788</id>
		<title>Rental Reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Reports&amp;diff=788"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Reports_Centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Property&amp;diff=786</id>
		<title>Rental Property</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Property&amp;diff=786"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Rental_Property_Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Quick_Start&amp;diff=784</id>
		<title>Quick Start</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Quick_Start&amp;diff=784"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Standout_-_Quick_Start]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Meta_/_Facebook_Property_Catalogue&amp;diff=782</id>
		<title>Meta / Facebook Property Catalogue</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Meta_/_Facebook_Property_Catalogue&amp;diff=782"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Meta_Facebook_Property_Catalogue]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Management_Reports&amp;diff=780</id>
		<title>Management Reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Management_Reports&amp;diff=780"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Reports_Centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary&amp;diff=778</id>
		<title>Diary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary&amp;diff=778"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Diary_Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Dashboard&amp;diff=776</id>
		<title>Dashboard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Dashboard&amp;diff=776"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[The_Dashboard]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Daily_Workflow&amp;diff=774</id>
		<title>Daily Workflow</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Daily_Workflow&amp;diff=774"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Daily_Negotiator_Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts&amp;diff=772</id>
		<title>Contacts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts&amp;diff=772"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Contacts_Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=770</id>
		<title>The Dashboard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=770"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= The Dashboard =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dashboard is the starting point for the working day. Use it to decide what needs attention rather than treating it only as a menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-of-day routine ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Review today&#039;s appointments.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review due/overdue tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check recently edited records where you are continuing work from yesterday.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the navigation/quick search to move into the next job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Appointments ==&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s appointments should be used to prepare for valuations, viewings and other diary work. Open the linked property/contact before the appointment where useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tasks ==&lt;br /&gt;
Prioritise overdue tasks, then today&#039;s tasks. See [[Task List]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notifications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications alert you to system/customer activity. Read and act on them rather than allowing the list to become background noise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Search ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use quick search before creating contacts/properties. Searching first is the simplest way to prevent duplicate records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Page Help ==&lt;br /&gt;
Where available, Page Help opens documentation relevant to the screen you are using.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Colleagues and profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the toolbar for colleague information and your own profile/settings. See [[Profile Configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What the Dashboard does not replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Dashboard highlights work, but the actual outcome still belongs in the correct Contact, Property, Diary, Task, Repair or Progression workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= What is the Dashboard? =&lt;br /&gt;
The dashboard is the main layout of Standout Property Manager, it is how the system is accessed and worked on, and can be broken down into the three areas as listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of your browser, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; displays options that are available on each and every screen displayed in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick explanation of these options are as follows:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notifications ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any notifications that require your attention, a counter will be display next indicating how many notifications you need to respond to. Notifications may be an upcoming appointment, a brochure that has been converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page Help ====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a popup help box that explains the current page or section that you have displayed. A link to the full help system should be displayed at the top, opening the full help system in a new browser tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Colleagues ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all your fellow colleagues, a green icon indicates that they’re currently logged in. If you want to send them (regardless of their logged in status) a sticky note message, click on the little yellow sticky note to see the following:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 02.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your message and then click Save for it to be displayed on their browser. You will see:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On your colleagues browser, a Notification will appear in their Toolbar:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When they go back to the Dashboard, your message will be displayed near the top right of their browser:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing your profile ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the information, configuration or settings for your Standout profile, click your name:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your profile will then open in a new browser tab. Please view our detail documentation regarding your profile configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Log Out ====&lt;br /&gt;
This simply logs you out of Standout and returns you to the Login screen. We recommend doing this when you’re away from your computer/device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
The left hand navigation is how we work woth elements of Standout Property Manager, each element is briefly described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo Area ====&lt;br /&gt;
The very top of the navigation bar will generally be your own agency logo, and is just used to make the sftware more personal to your own agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Quick Search ====&lt;br /&gt;
The quick serach can be used to search for a property or a contact, just type in a name, address, reference number, telephone number or email address then press enter, the system will then return anything that it thinks is valid for the information given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Dashboard will return you to the dashboard screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Tawk To =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Task list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Properties ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Telephone wizard ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add property ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Property list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Progress ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rental ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Bulk rental payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenant list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contacts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contacts to delete ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hot contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
Think of Hot contacts as your Hot Box, the list of contacts that you relly want to deal with, cash buyers etc, click [https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview#Heat_Rating here] for more information on Hot contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Online Manuals ===&lt;br /&gt;
You guessed, the online manuals is the Standout Wiki pages your reading now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administration ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Smart Dashboard&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Smart Dashboard gives you a flexible overview of your day in Standout. It brings together useful information such as recent properties, recent contacts, diary items, tasks, performance, and local weather in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the previous dashboard, the Smart Dashboard can be arranged to suit the way you work, so you can keep the panels most important to you where you want them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rearranging your dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can personalise the Smart Dashboard by moving the panels into the order that suits you best.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To rearrange the dashboard:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click and hold the panel you want to move.&lt;br /&gt;
Drag it to a new position on the dashboard.&lt;br /&gt;
Release it when it is in the place you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your layout will be saved, so the dashboard should continue to display in your chosen order when you return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows each user to organise the dashboard in the way that best matches their daily workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Office 365 Integration ====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link your account to Office 365. This allows appointments created in Standout to also appear in your Outlook Calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you log in, Standout will synchronise new and existing future appointments with Outlook. If you need to make changes to an appointment, you should always edit it in Standout, not Outlook, so that the synchronisation continues correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create an appointment for another member of staff, the appointment may still appear in your Outlook calendar, but the notes will make it clear who is attending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited listings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows properties that you have recently created or edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information displayed may include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
main photo&lt;br /&gt;
property reference&lt;br /&gt;
contract&lt;br /&gt;
status&lt;br /&gt;
price&lt;br /&gt;
display address&lt;br /&gt;
quick link to edit&lt;br /&gt;
for rental properties, a quick link to Agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see shortcuts to view All properties and All businesses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows contacts that you have recently created or edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information displayed may include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
title&lt;br /&gt;
first name&lt;br /&gt;
surname&lt;br /&gt;
contact type, for example Applicant, Tenant, Landlord, Vendor, Contractor, or Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick link is provided so you can open and edit the contact record directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see a shortcut to view All contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Today&#039;s appointments and outstanding tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows appointments and tasks that are assigned to you for today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking an item, you will be taken to the Diary, where you can view the full details and update them if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see quick actions such as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View diary – opens today’s Diary&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task – allows you to add a new task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Performance Chart ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel provides an overview of property performance over recent months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is designed to give you a quick visual summary of activity, such as properties that have been Let, Completed, or Withdrawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is intended as an at-a-glance performance view rather than a detailed report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Local weather ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel displays the local weather using the town or postcode held in your branch configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides a useful forecast for the current day and the coming days ahead. This can be especially helpful when planning property photography or viewings, as good weather can make a property more appealing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Task_List&amp;diff=768</id>
		<title>Task List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Task_List&amp;diff=768"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Tasks =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks are for actions that need to happen later. They should answer three questions: &#039;&#039;&#039;what needs doing, who owns it, and when should it be done?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a task when ==&lt;br /&gt;
* a customer asks for a call back;&lt;br /&gt;
* a vendor needs chasing after a valuation;&lt;br /&gt;
* a solicitor needs chasing;&lt;br /&gt;
* a landlord/tenant action cannot be completed immediately;&lt;br /&gt;
* an Opportunity Finder lead needs following up;&lt;br /&gt;
* another member of staff must do something by a date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use a task as a substitute for recording the result of something that has already happened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating a useful task ==&lt;br /&gt;
A good task has:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a clear action-oriented subject;&lt;br /&gt;
* the correct staff owner;&lt;br /&gt;
* a realistic due date/time;&lt;br /&gt;
* the related contact/property where possible;&lt;br /&gt;
* enough notes to understand why the task exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Call Mrs Jones for valuation decision. Valued 24/08 at £325k. She wanted to speak to partner over weekend.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
is better than:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Call Mrs Jones&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Creating A Task.png|none|thumb|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tasks from a Contact or Property ==&lt;br /&gt;
Where the task relates to a specific record, create it from that Contact/Property so the relationship is retained.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create A Task Contact.png|none|thumb|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Completing a task ==&lt;br /&gt;
When the action has been done:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# record any outcome that belongs on the Contact/Property;&lt;br /&gt;
# create another task if a new future action is agreed;&lt;br /&gt;
# mark the original task complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeatedly change the same task date to hide unfinished work if the underlying situation has changed. Update the note/next action so the history remains understandable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Daily task discipline ==&lt;br /&gt;
At the start of the day, deal with overdue tasks before future tasks. At the end of the day, complete finished tasks and move genuinely unfinished work to a realistic date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Task List.png|none|thumb|1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tasks list =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Task List.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks lists allows you to keep track of all tasks within the branch. By default, the logged in user will be shown in the dropdown list and all outstanding tasks will be shown. These tasks will show:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dropdown list             will show all teams that the user is a member of, all staff within the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For                               the user who has been assigned the task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Created by                  the user who created the task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date                            the date that the task is to be completed by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subject                        the subject of the task (by holding the mouse over, will display the description – only if one has been entered)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reference                   if a task has been created against a property, the reference will be displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property Address        if a task has been created against a property, the address will be displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact                       if a task has been created against a contact, the contact name will be displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Subject                                     opens the task in the Diary&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reference / Property Address            opens the property in a new tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact                                               opens the contact details in a new tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create a task =&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to create a task – this will NOT be associated with either a property or a contact&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateATask.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simply click on the righthand side on the “Create a task”, you will then see the Diary to then allow you to create the task. See below for detailed information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create a task – Property =&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks can be created from Property List (saving you having to open a property to edit)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create A Task Property.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Edit on the righthand side to open the dropdown menu options and choose Create a task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks can be created from within a Property&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create A Task Property 2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click More actions and then click Create a task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See below for detailed information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create a task – Contact =&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks can be created from Landlord, Tenant, Contact List (saves opening a contact to edit)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create A Task Contact.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Edit on the righthand side to open the dropdown menu options and choose Create a task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks can be created from within a Contact&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create A Task Contact2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click More actions and then click Create a task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See below for detailed information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creating a task =&lt;br /&gt;
Once you create a task (regardless of where from within Standout) you will be presented with the Diary. Choose the day that you require the task to be completed by (or double click today and then change the “Target” date&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Creating A Task.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subject                        a quick description of the task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         if you wish to assign this task to another branch/staff member&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For                               who is the task for (if not yourself)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Target Date                 when is this task to be completed by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reminder                    if you wish to set a reminder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes                          a detailed description of the task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Editing a task =&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods of editing a task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Tasks lists&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit A Task.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Diary&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit A Task Diary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the details from this screen, if the task is assigned to a property or contact, you can click the “View” button to see those details in a new tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Completing a task =&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods of completing a task.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit A Task.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can simply click “Complete task” and this will mark the task as completed, it will then be removed from this list (but still visible in the diary).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit A Task Diary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And by clicking the Complete tick box and then the Save button will complete this task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tasks created by Opportunity Finder =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Opportunity Finder]] can create a follow-up task directly from an opportunity. The task is created in Standout&#039;s normal diary/task system and is linked to the relevant contact and property where available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the task is managed exactly like any other task: it can be opened from the Task List or Diary, reassigned where appropriate, edited, reminded and completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Standout_-_Quick_Start&amp;diff=766</id>
		<title>Standout - Quick Start</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Standout_-_Quick_Start&amp;diff=766"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Standout Quick Start =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This guide is for a new member of staff who needs to become productive quickly. It concentrates on the working habits that make Standout useful, rather than trying to explain every field on every screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 1. Start the day from the Dashboard ==&lt;br /&gt;
After signing in, use the [[The Dashboard|Dashboard]] to answer four questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# What appointments do I have today?&lt;br /&gt;
# Which tasks are due or overdue?&lt;br /&gt;
# Are there new notifications or customer activity that needs attention?&lt;br /&gt;
# Which properties or contacts have I recently been working on?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the Dashboard only as a launch page. It is intended to show the work that is waiting for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your agency uses Office 365 integration, sign in to Office 365 when prompted so diary appointments can also be created in your Outlook calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New Dashboard.png|none|thumb|1200px|The Dashboard brings together the work that needs attention.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 2. Work the Communications Centre ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open [[Communications Centre]] early in the day and during the day as new work arrives. It combines portal leads, website enquiries and Customer Portal conversations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the queue to assign enquiries, link an existing Contact, create an applicant where necessary and record the real workflow status. Do not reply to Customer Portal notification emails; open the conversation in Standout and reply there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Communications Centre]] and [[Inbound Enquiries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 3. Search before you create ==&lt;br /&gt;
A large proportion of CRM problems start with duplicate contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding a person, search by one or more of:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* surname;&lt;br /&gt;
* telephone/mobile;&lt;br /&gt;
* email address;&lt;br /&gt;
* postcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the person already exists, update the existing contact. A single contact can have several relationships with the agency, for example applicant, vendor and landlord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Contacts Overview]] and [[Registering a New Applicant]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 4. Keep the contact record useful ==&lt;br /&gt;
A contact should contain enough information for another member of staff to continue the conversation without starting again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a minimum, keep these current:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* telephone/mobile and email;&lt;br /&gt;
* contact type;&lt;br /&gt;
* address where relevant;&lt;br /&gt;
* notes from meaningful conversations;&lt;br /&gt;
* applicant requirements;&lt;br /&gt;
* property-to-sell position;&lt;br /&gt;
* solicitor and compliance information when the transaction reaches that stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When somebody&#039;s circumstances change, update Standout while you are speaking to them. Do not rely on a separate notebook or inbox to become the real record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 5. Use requirements rather than memory ==&lt;br /&gt;
For an applicant, record what they actually want in [[Managing Applicant Requirements and Matching|Requirements]]. This allows Standout to match them to current properties and gives other staff a consistent picture of the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customers with Customer Portal access can also maintain their own requirements. Staff and customers are editing the same underlying requirement records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6. Put appointments in the Diary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the [[Diary Overview|Diary]] for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* valuations;&lt;br /&gt;
* viewings;&lt;br /&gt;
* inspections;&lt;br /&gt;
* staff visits;&lt;br /&gt;
* meetings and other appointments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a viewing or valuation is connected to a property/contact, book it through the relevant Standout workflow rather than entering an unrelated generic calendar entry. That preserves the relationship between the diary, property and customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 7. Use Tasks for things that must happen later ==&lt;br /&gt;
If an action cannot be completed now, create a [[Task List|task]]. Good examples include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* chase a vendor for a decision after valuation;&lt;br /&gt;
* call an applicant after a viewing;&lt;br /&gt;
* chase a solicitor;&lt;br /&gt;
* re-contact a landlord next week;&lt;br /&gt;
* follow up an Opportunity Finder lead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A CRM is only useful if future work is captured when it is agreed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 8. Follow the property lifecycle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For sales, the normal journey is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Valuation enquiry → valuation appointment → awaiting decision → instructed/marketing preparation → available → viewings → offers → SSTC/sale agreed → progression → exchange → completion&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use [[Sales Valuation to Instruction]], [[Marketing a Property]], [[Recording and Negotiating Offers]] and [[Sales Progression to Completion]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For lettings, use [[Adding a new Rental Property]], [[Creating and Starting a Tenancy]], [[Rental Compliance and Inspections]] and [[Managing Repairs and Maintenance]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9. Keep customers informed with Customer Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
From a Contact record, use the prominent &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Customer Portal link&#039;&#039;&#039; button to invite the customer to [[Customer Portal]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer Portal can reduce routine chasing by allowing customers to see relevant progress, documents, viewings, repairs and requirements themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Using the Customer Portal]] for the recommended staff workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 10. Use Opportunity Finder as a daily prospecting list ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Opportunity Finder]] identifies contacts worth speaking to, such as buyers with a property to sell, lapsed valuations, withdrawn vendors and dormant applicants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not simply browse the list. Work the opportunity, then use &#039;&#039;&#039;Create follow-up task&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Mark contacted&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Snooze&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Dismiss&#039;&#039;&#039; so the queue remains meaningful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A good Standout habit ==&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of each conversation or activity, ask:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Has the contact/property information changed?&lt;br /&gt;
# Is there a note or result that somebody else needs to know?&lt;br /&gt;
# Is there a future action that needs a task or appointment?&lt;br /&gt;
# Should the customer&#039;s requirements or transaction stage change?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If those four things are kept current, Standout becomes a useful shared operating system rather than a filing cabinet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Accessing Standout Property Manager&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;To access Standout Property Manager, it’s best to use an up to date web browser. We suggest Chrome, but all modern browsers should work without issue. However, we do not recommend older Internet Explorer browsers as this application can be problematic.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Enter the following URL to gain access to Standout Property Manager:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.standoutpropertymanager.co.uk/login&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;We would suggest bookmarking the above link in your browser for easy access.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Logging into Standout Property Manager&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;You should be presented with the systems login page, which looks like:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The above is a snippit from the login page, to proceed you’ll need to know you’re Client ID and Login Name.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;If you’ve forgotten your password, you can click on the wording “click here” to then reset your password.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Whilst using Standout Property Manager, should you require help or information, please do not hesitate to send an email to our Support Team. The email address is support@issl.co.uk and a support ticket will be opened in our Technical Support Online System where one of our technicians will contact you in due course.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Click Continue.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Enter your password and then click Log in.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Factor Authentication&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;If 2nd factor authentication is enabled on your account you will need to enter the 6-digit code to proceed, you will need your smart phone at this point. 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Factor Authentication is an advanced security system that prevents access to your account unless you have the time&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;limited code.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Google Authenticator is available in both Google Play Store and Apple App Store.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Dashboard&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; =  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The dashboard is the default screen and where will come back to. There are six parts to this screen.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Dashboard options run down the left side&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Status Bar – runs across the top&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Dashboard quick views&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Business Overview – shows relevant information regarding your properties. These will appear as more data is entered into the system&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Your recently edited listings&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Today’s appointments and Tasks&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Your recently edited contacts&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Performance chart&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;This will show you all the properties that have a status of Sales Completed / Rentals Let / Withdrawn&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Local weather&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;This will show a 7 day weather forecast at your office town. You can then change this for a postcode or town of your choice. This has been added to allow you to check the weather when photographing a property and choose the potential best day for outside photographs.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Dashboard options&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Tawk to                       integrated web chat client Tawk To – allows agents to chat with&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   website users visiting your website (when implemented)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Diary                            an internal diary to store all appointments and diarised items&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Add property              add a new property onto the system&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Property List               list all properties on the system with a given criteria&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Progress                      list all properties with progress markers against them&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Rental&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Bulk rental payments  enter daily payments for rental payments&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Tenant list                   show all tenants (with active tenancy agreements)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Landlord list                show all landlords (with active tenancy agreements)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Businesses&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Add Business               should you sell businesses, enter these in this section&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Business list                list all businesses on the system with a given criteria&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Contacts&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Add contact                add a new contact onto the system&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Contact list                  list all contacts on the system with a given criteria&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Contacts to delete      list all contacts that you are able to remove from the system&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Hot contacts               those contacts that you deem to be a hot contact&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Reports                       various reports that extract data from the system to either&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Spreadsheet or PDF.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Holiday Requests        those users that are able to approve or deny holiday requests will&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   See this option appear once staff members place a holiday request.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Administration             all the administration options to configure your agency, branches,&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   staff and various other options&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Status bar&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Version                        the systems version number, by clicking this option, shows you all the&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   versions and improvements.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Notifications                a quick view of all the system notifications, including diary&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;appointments.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Page help                    throughout the system, clicking this should show help information&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   regarding the section that you’re working on.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Colleagues                   shows colleagues that are logged onto the system&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Your name                   clicking this gives access for editing your profile (opens in a new tab)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Log Out                       when you finish using the system, then log out for security&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Sticky Notes                create a post-it note type note on your desktop for reminders etc&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   You can also create and store sticky notes in contacts and properties&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Within the notes tab.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Business overview&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Business Overview contains useful information at a glance, such as how many new&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;clients have been entered this week, whether feedback has been received and relayed to&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;vendors, and whether there are any contacts with bounced emails (which is where an email&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;sent by Stand Out Property Manager has been rejected, which is likely due to an invalid email address).&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Examples are&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Available sales&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Available rentals&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;listings awaiting decision&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   listings with no viewings in the last 30 days&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Agent awaiting viewing feedback&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Vendors/Landlords awaiting viewing feedback&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Contacts with bounced emails&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Your recently edited listings&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;This section shows a list of properties you’ve recently edited, showing their contract, address, status.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Your recently edited contacts&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;This section shows a list of recent contacts and their definition on the system.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Today’s appointments&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Shows appointments for yourself, and teams that you are assigned to.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Version Control – Important Note&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;As versions are implemented regularly (usually monthly), we do recommend that you read the release notes. The version will flash until you click on it but is important to view this information as if you have recommended a system change or improvement, will let you know what has been released.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Notifications&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; ===           &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;When you have notifications a “pill” will appear with the number of notifications, if you wish to delete them, simply hover over it and click on the x for it to be permanently deleted.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Page Help&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Throughout Standout, each page has its own page help to assist with you when completing the entries on that page.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Colleagues – sending quick messages&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; ===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Standout has the ability to send notes to other members of your branch, by clicking on the staff member you will see:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Sending a note:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Receiving a note:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Getting Started with your Clients&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;When you have a new client, this section will advise on the processes to follow for the following:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                       Selling a Property&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                       Buying a Property&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                       Letting a Property&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                       Renting a Property&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Additional documentation can be found on the ISSL Knowledgebase for all facets of Standout including Contacts, Properties, Rentals.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The latest versions can be found at:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.issl.co.uk/support/download/category/4/Standout-User-Manuals.html&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Selling a Property (Vendor)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;When a client wishes to use your services to sell their property, we recommend the following:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter the property – Pre-Valuation stage&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter the contact – link to the property&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Book Valuation appointment&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter property details, photos and valuation&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Once accepted, place property as Available (on website/portals)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   &#039;&#039;See below (Buying a Property)&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;During each stage Standout will allow you:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Buying a Property (Purchaser)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter contact details&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Book viewing&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Update system with viewing feedback&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Place and offer – Repeat if offer isn’t accepted&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Accept offer&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Send contracts&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Finialise the Sale (SSTC)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Completed – once everything has been exchanged&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;During each stage Standout will allow you:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Letting a Property (Landlord)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;When a client wishes to use your services to let their property, we recommend the following:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter the property – Pre-Valuation stage&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                               Management option:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                                           No – client only uses you to obtain a tenant&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                                           Rent collection – you collect the rent on behalf of the&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Landlord&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Yes – you look after the property on behalf of the Landlord and are responsible for all agreed arrangement.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter the contact – link to the property&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Book Valuation appointment&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter property details, photos and valuation&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Once accepted, place property as Available (on website/portals)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   &#039;&#039;See below (Letting a Property)&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;During each stage Standout will allow you:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Renting a Property (Applicant/Tenant)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Enter contact details&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Book viewing&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Update system with viewing feedback&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Place and offer – Repeat if offer isn’t accepted&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Accept offer&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Create Rental Agreement&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Finialise the Letting (Let)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                                   Use Bulk Payments or the Financials Tab within a Property/Rental&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Agreement&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Additional Contacts&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Standout can also help with the following additional contacts:&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                       Solicitors&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                       Contractors&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;                       Rental Guarantor&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;           &amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting started ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Property_Overview&amp;diff=764</id>
		<title>Rental Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Property_Overview&amp;diff=764"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Rental Property Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Rental property area should tell staff four things at a glance: &#039;&#039;&#039;who occupies the property, what the tenancy terms are, whether the property is compliant, and whether anything needs attention.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental lifecycle ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Valuation/instruction → available → tenant selected → tenancy setup → active tenancy → inspections/compliance/repairs/payments → renewal or tenancy end&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use [[Rental Step Through]] for the full journey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Active tenancy ==&lt;br /&gt;
For a managed property, keep the agreement information current, including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* tenant(s)/occupants;&lt;br /&gt;
* start/end dates;&lt;br /&gt;
* rent and payment terms;&lt;br /&gt;
* deposit/bond information;&lt;br /&gt;
* management/service details;&lt;br /&gt;
* guarantor information where used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use [[Creating and Starting a Tenancy]] when setting up a new agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
Do not treat certificate dates as passive reference data. They should drive action before expiry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typical items include gas safety, EICR, EPC, property licence, deposit information and Right to Rent as relevant to the tenancy/property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Rental Compliance and Inspections]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inspections and service appointments ==&lt;br /&gt;
Record property inspections/service visits through the appropriate appointment workflow so staff can see what is due and what has been booked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Repairs ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Repairs workflow to record the issue, assign a contractor, record quote/final cost and track completion. See [[Managing Repairs and Maintenance]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenants using Customer Portal can report repairs, and landlords can respond to recorded repair quotes where that portal workflow is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Financials and arrears ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use tenancy financials for rent/payment transactions. The [[Tenant List]] provides a useful operational view of current tenants, agreements, balances and repairs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For overdue payments use [[Chase Outstanding Rent]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Utility providers and inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
Record utility and inventory information where your agency process requires it, especially when it will be needed at move-in/move-out or for ongoing management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory.png|none|thumb|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
Landlords can see relevant tenancy/compliance/repair information. Tenants can see tenancy details and report repairs. Customer Portal does not replace staff responsibility for reviewing compliance or financial information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related guides ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a new Rental Property]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating and Starting a Tenancy]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rental Compliance and Inspections]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Managing Repairs and Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tenant List]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chase Outstanding Rent]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating a rental property ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental Modes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout works with three modes of Rental properties classed as Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Managed?&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this mode all you are responsible for is to find a tenant for a Landlords property, normally just a fee will be raised for this service.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent Collection&lt;br /&gt;
|In this mode you will collect rent from tenants and pass the payment minus your fees to the Landlord and are not responsible for anything regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes&lt;br /&gt;
|In this mode you will arrange everything concerning the property, repairs, certificates, rent.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Picture 1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rental options ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shared property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can cater for a Shared Property (HMO) and can be configured by part of the system. For an in-depth overview, please see our document “Rental Property HMO Overview”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property finance information&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Finance.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the financial information regarding the property from the landlord, these figures can be stored here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mortgage provider information         who the current mortgage is with&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mortgage terms                                  the number of years on the mortgage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase price                                    what was paid for this property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase date                                     when the Landlord purchased the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monthly repayment amount              how much the Landlord is repaying on this property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utility providers ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utility Providers.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout allows you to store the current utility providers that service this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory.png|none|thumb|330x330px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a property has items that within it that the Landlord has agreed that the tenant can use, this section will record those items&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory Details.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Please note: You must have a Dropbox or Google Drive account configured if you wish to upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room              which room is the item in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item Name      name of the item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        what condition is it in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quantity          how many of these item(s)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value               value of the item(s)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes              additional notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory Example.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inventory print ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory Print.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
The report will be shown in a new tab in your browser, allowing you to print either onto paper or to a PDF document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Repairs – recording, assigning and invoicing ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Repairs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When a tenant contacts your branch to report a repair in this tab you can record the repair, then you can allocate this repair to a contractor. Once a contractor has undertaken the repair, an invoice can then be raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding a repair ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adding a Repair.png|900px|thumb|none|alt=Adding a repair to a rental property|Adding a repair to a rental property]]&lt;br /&gt;
This form will allow you to record the repair whilst your tenant in on the phone or in branch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contractor type                                a  list of contractors for selection&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor List.png|none|thumb|275x275px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contractor                                         a list of contractors you’ve created, if you haven’t got a contractor entered, you can enter one here                                                        &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor Selection.png|none|thumb|335x335px]]&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           By clicking Create contact a new tab will open in your browser&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date reported                                   the date tenant reports the issue(s)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reported to                                       the staff member logging the report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date passed to contractor              date the staff member passes to the contractor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date to be fixed                                date quoted by the contractor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date fixed                                          date of the actual repair&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact method                               how did the tenant contact you – phone/visit?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of problem                   full description of this repair/issue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Addition staff notes                         any internal staff note&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quoted cost                                      quoted cost by the contractor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fixed cost                                          the actual cost (if different than the quote)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send repair to contractor by SMS           Send the details (either creating or editing) to a contractor by SMS (you MUST enter the contractors mobile address) AND have SMS credit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signed off by tenant / agent           work completed and accepted by tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this has been saved, you will need to re-edit this repair, to enter additional details, costs, change of contractor.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepairNew.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Updating the repair =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Updating a Repair to a rental property.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Having chosen (or even amended the contractor), update the repair with any further details such as quoted date, cost or additional information relevant to the repair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Send details to the contractor =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Send Details To Contractor.png|none|thumb|527x527px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above is the Master Letter but you can duplicate and amend this letter (Administration/Letter templates). By choosing Email, when you click the Go button, Standout will queue and send your letter by email to the contractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the repair has been completed, update the repair with the final details&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Update Repair.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on Save and then Save Property, both saves are required prior to raising an invoice to the Landlord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Invoicing the Landlord =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Invoice Landlord.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Simply click the Invoice landlord which will then raise an invoice, to view invoices, if you go to Rental Agreements and then Financials you will then be able to see the invoice in the transactions list&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Invoice List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print an invoice to the Landlord (or Tenant) – for this example we will choose the Finders Fee transaction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Actions then Print Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Print Invoice.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whilst you can select either, it best to use Landlord Invoice for Landlords and Tenant Invoice for Tenants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Printing the invoice =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Print Invoice 2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can either print the Letter, Email or both, choose your option then click Go. If you’ve configured a file storage provider, copies are stored in the Files tab in the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recurring payments ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Recurring Payments.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
These payments generate a payment request to the tenant, and are intended to be used for things like extra car parking space, gardening services, window cleaning etc, automatically applied to active agreements and can be seen in the Financials tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating a recurring payment ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create Recurring Payment.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabled                                               to save deleting payments, Enable or Disable as required&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Details of recurring payment              Details of the payment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring amount                               How much is the payment required from the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frequency period                               How often do you need an invoice raising&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day of payment                                  Which Day (Sunday-Saturay)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subject to VAT                                    Does the amount include VAT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Recurring payment example =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Recurring Payments Example.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Recurring payment example in Financials =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Recurring Payments in Financials.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To print or email a copy of the invoice to the tenant, just click Actions then choose Print Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Service appointments ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Service Appointments.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
These appointments are an easy way to create a diary appointment when an appliance requires a service, such as a boiler, fire alarm, burglar alarm or anything else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating a service appointment ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have logged into Office 365 (click the Login to Office 365 button on your Dashboard), any service appointments created in Standout will automatically be added to your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit an appointment in Outlook Calendar but in the Standout Diary.[[File:Create A Service Appointment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contractor type                                a  list of contractors for selection&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor List.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contractor                                         a list of contractors you’ve created, if you haven’t got a contractor entered, you can enter one here&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor Selection.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subject of the service appointment   This is the subject line of the email that will be sent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Details of service appointment          Details of the service appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date of the appointment                    When the contractor is required at the rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time of appointment                          What time is the contractor expected at the rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Service appointment example =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Service Appointment Example.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rent review appointments ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rent Review Appointments.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
These appointments are an easy way to create a diary appointment when arranging a rental price review with the current tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating a rent review appointment ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have logged into Office 365 (click the Login to Office 365 button on your Dashboard), any appointments created in Standout will automatically be added to your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit an appointment in Outlook Calendar but in the Standout Diary.[[File:Create Rent Review Appointment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subject of the appointment               This is the subject line of the email that will be sent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Details of appointment                       Details of the rent review appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date of the appointment                    When the contractor is required at the rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time of appointment                          What time is the contractor expected at the rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Rent review appointment example =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rent Review Appointment Example.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Occupants ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Occupants.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section is to record those occupants under 18 years of age that may need to be recorded. An occupant can only be added to a property whilst there is a tenancy agreement in place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding an occupant ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adding an Occupant.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter their Name, Gender, Date of birth and any notes that need to be stored, clicking Save will either add a new occupant or update an existing one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental Mode - Fully Managed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document will assume that you’ve created a new property, linked it to a Landlord, placed it on the market and have now found a tenant for said property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout this process, Standout will offer to create Letters to send to all parties concerned. These will be stored against the property and will allow them to be printed and/or emailed. Side note – all Letters can be amended in Administration / Letters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once your potential client has visited the property (Book Viewing) and offers a rental figure, open the property and select the Viewing / offer tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll see all the viewings and offers. Select your client, click Make offer (print/email appropriate letter) you will then see&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings And Offers.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Accept offer and a warning will appear near the top/centre of your screen&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Accept Offer.png|none|thumb|480x480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can print/email or both when producing letters, click Go to print your documents for each of the contacts (Standout creates docx documents).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once complete, click the Back to Property button near the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The property is now at the status of “Under offer”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once under offer and you’ve completed all the necessary credit checks, obtained the deposit from the tenant, you can then create the tenancy agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating the tenancy agreement ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMS text messages can be sent to the tenant, this can be from one to seven days before the rent being due. This option is reliant on one of three configuration settings, a valid email and/or a valid mobile number on the tenant record and SMS credits will need to be purchased, for more information see the Administration Manual and/or the system in Administration / Branch / SMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please see below where to configure these settings in an agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Actions.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click More actions and then choose the Rental agreements option to continue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agreements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agreements.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any older agreements exist, they will be listed on the left side of the screen and can be viewed. To create an agreement, all the required information will be on the right side of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agreement Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Agreement Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within Agreement details, the following information needs to be input:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement Date                     the date the agreement is created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reference                               a unique reference for this tenancy agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                               Weekly/Monthly/Quarterly/Annually/Per 4 Weeks/Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial Period (Monthly)          the amount of time (in months) the tenancy is for (eg: 6/12/18/24)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start Date                                the date the Tenant moves into the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
End Date                                 the date that the agreement ends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rolling Contract                      if both Landlord and Tenant agrees to a rolling contract set this option to Yes, otherwise No for the contact to end&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Auto Update Tenancy             change the Tenants address automatically from the one&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                                   entered on the system, with the address of this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let Price                                  the price the Tenant will pay during the tenancy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond Price                               the price of the Bond that will be paid and transferred to your Deposit Holding Scheme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finders Fee                             the amount you charge a Landlord for arranging a tenancy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First Payment Due                  the first date when payments are due&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment Terms                       the number of days when a payment becomes overdue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day to pay Landlord               when you are due to pay the Landlord his part of a tenancy Payment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send a rent reminder             If you choose to send the tenant a rent reminder, you can&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose between 0 (disabled) up to 7 days prior&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send rent reminder by           How to send the reminder – Disabled / Email / SMS&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenancy deposit Scheme        which scheme you have signed to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deposit Scheme reference     reference for this bond payment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional Clauses                  any addition clauses that may be outside of the written&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tenancy agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note – Rent reminder emails can be customised by go to Administration/Email templates and duplicate the master version for your own agent version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; SMS messages will only be sent if there is sufficient credit on your account (to check this go to Administration / Branch / Branch Name then the SMS tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Initial Inspection Visit ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Initial Inspection.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have visited the property prior to this can be recorded here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Guarantor ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Guarantor.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you require a tenant to provide a guarantor, once you’ve added their details into the system, you can start typing their first name will appear in this area to link to this agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fee details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fee Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the amount you take from the rental amount to pay for your services. This can be a fixed amount or a Percentage. Fees will be applied on either the due date of the tenants payment or when the tenant actually pays that periods rent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff details&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a member of Staff to enter all diary appointment and reminders to. This does not have to be the member of staff creating the agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Meter readings ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Meter Readings.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====  Start of Tenancy ====&lt;br /&gt;
Compete all those know fields prior to the tenant moving in, if you have that information to hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== During Tenancy ====&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the tenancy you can add meter readings, click the Record readings button. Then choose the date the meter readings were provided by your tenant. You must enter at least 1 meter reading for the information to be recorded. They can be either Gas, Electricity, Water or Oil. Once you have entered at least one set of meter readings, all readings will be displayed in a table. Should you enter the wrong information, you can delete those details by clicking and confirming your deletion request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the information has been completed, click Create agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating the Tenancy Agreement ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create The Tenancy Agreement.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful creation of a tenancy agreement the system will take you to the Letter section. There will be a selection of pre-defined and user-defined letters available. Prior to using the system, we recommend that you create agency specific documents, especially tenancy agreements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default (Master) documents are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Assured Shorthold Tenancy Agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Assured Shorthold Tenancy Agreement – ROOM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Rental Agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Standing Order Mandate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rental Agreement (Master – example) ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Agreement Letter.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Go to create the documents (they will download to your computer)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Back to Property button and all the created documents will be placed in the Files linked to this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Financials ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financials.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You will see two transactions, an invoice to the Landlord for the Finders Fee and a Bond request for the Tenant pay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Bond payment ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first payment to be registered on the system, is the Tenants payment of their Bond&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bond Payment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direction                     From a Tenant/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   To a Tenant/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Party                           Landlord/Tenant/Other for tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment Method        Cash / Bacs / Cheque / Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment Type             Rent / Other / Bond&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                       Amount being paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date                            Date of the transaction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reference                   Reference of the payment (free form text)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                 a free form description of the transaction&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BP2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will see that the system has automatically assigned the Bond payment to the Bond request and is marked as Paid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current status of our tenanted property now shows the Financials as&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financials After Bond Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We explained earlier in this document how to create an invoice (and a recurring invoice) to the tenant and the landlord, they now show as unpaid. In our scenario (which will probably never occur – but, so that we can show transactions in this document) is that the tenant received keys, started to move in and then subsequently lost them, the Landlord agreed in good faith to pay half so we have raised an invoice to the Landlord for £100 for the contractors fee and then an invoice to the tenant for £50 as they split the bill. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenant Rent payment ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will record a payment of the Tenants first month’s rent on the 10/04/20 within the Bulk Payment section – for how to do this and see how to use Bulk Payments, please see the Bulk Payments Document. We also paid the outstanding tenant invoice for the locksmith.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tenant Rent Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our tenant does not owe any monies as all payments, rent due and invoices have now been completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord payment ====&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on how you have configured the agreement, the payment to the Landlord will either be due now, or after a number of days (we configured it for 2 days from receiving payment). In our example, the Landlord is now due a payment of £247.87.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landlord Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Financials statement ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financials Statement.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The financials statement shows that all parties are even (no payments due) but, two invoices show that they have not been paid. As this is incorrect, simply choose Actions and click “Mark paid” to both of them&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financials Statement2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now all figures and financial lines are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord statement ====&lt;br /&gt;
Should a Landlord with to obtain a statement from you, all you need to do, is choose from the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landlord Statement 1.png|none|thumb|368x368px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the chosen Date range and click Generate statement&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landlord Statement 2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then either Download Statement or Email PDF to contact depending on your requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Emailing all tenants ===&lt;br /&gt;
When editing a Shared property (HMO), you can now email all the tenants with a current agreement. Simply click More actions and then Email all tenants button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email All Tenants.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simply add a subject and email body, click Send email and all tenants that have supplied an email address will receive the email. This could be used when tenants need to be informed of communal area repairs or disruptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Rent Reminder Email Template =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To amend the template, go to Administration / Email Templates tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When customising your own email, ensure that you click the “Duplicate” button before editing, once you’ve completed your changes, click “Save email”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the wording of this email, but you must ensure that you keep the field names within {} the same, otherwise, the system will not replace them correctly for your tenant details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Move for landlords and tenants =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[My Move Customer Portal|My Move]] extends the rental workflow with secure landlord and tenant self-service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an active tenancy, a tenant can view relevant tenancy/compliance information and report a repair. The repair feeds into Standout&#039;s existing repair workflow and records the authenticated tenant as the reporter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A linked landlord can view repair information and, where a contractor quote is available, approve or decline the quote with an optional comment. The response is retained as an auditable decision and the branch is notified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair reporting requires a current active tenancy. A prospective tenant with only a rental offer cannot submit a maintenance request. Landlord quote approval is restricted to a contact genuinely linked to the property as landlord/owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=762</id>
		<title>Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=762"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Sales Property Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Property record is the live operational record for a sales instruction. Instead of thinking of it as a collection of tabs, use it as the place where the property moves through its lifecycle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The normal sales lifecycle ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Pre-valuation → valuation booked → awaiting decision → instructed/prepared → available → viewings/offers → sale agreed/SSTC → progression → exchanged → completed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The exact status names available can depend on agency configuration and guided/free mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What to do at each stage ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Stage&lt;br /&gt;
! Main job in Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Valuation enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Link the owner, record basic property information and [[Sales Valuation to Instruction|book the valuation]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting decision&lt;br /&gt;
| Record valuation advice and create a follow-up action.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Instructed&lt;br /&gt;
| Complete particulars, media, price and marketing information.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Available&lt;br /&gt;
| Match applicants, manage enquiries and [[Booking and Managing Viewings|book viewings]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Viewings/offers&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Recording Viewing Feedback|Record feedback]] and [[Recording and Negotiating Offers|offers]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sale agreed/SSTC&lt;br /&gt;
| Confirm parties/solicitors/chain information and begin [[Sales Progression to Completion|progression]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Exchanged/completed&lt;br /&gt;
| Record the final transaction stage and any associated invoice/completion information required by your agency.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address and ownership ==&lt;br /&gt;
Keep the property address/display address accurate because it is used throughout marketing and customer communication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Link the correct owner/vendor contacts rather than typing ownership information only into notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics that affect matching and marketing ==&lt;br /&gt;
Fields such as bedrooms, property type/style, price and location are not cosmetic. They affect applicant matching and portal presentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions, rooms and media ==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete marketing information once the vendor instructs. Keep descriptions factual and make sure media is ordered appropriately before launch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal information ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use internal fields/notes for agency-only information such as access instructions or operational details. Do not put internal comments into customer-facing descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings and offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the linked property workflow rather than generic notes. The viewing/offer history should explain who viewed, the outcome and any negotiation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progression ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a sale is agreed, use progression markers and chain information to make the current position visible at a glance. See [[Sales Progression to Completion]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documents and history ==&lt;br /&gt;
Store relevant property documents in Standout and use history to understand important changes. Customer Portal may expose selected customer-visible information, but it does not expose every internal property document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related workflows ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Sales Valuation to Instruction]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Marketing a Property]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Booking and Managing Viewings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recording Viewing Feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recording and Negotiating Offers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Sales Progression to Completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin with, the following should be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property reference     A unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         Only shown if you have multiple branches, this will then allow you to choose a branch accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date available             When the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Latitude and Longitude ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sitting Tenants ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basics are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract                          For Sale / To Let / Auction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build                    Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenure                          Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Let options ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commercial options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial type :        Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Business Sales ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business name            the name of the business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – To Let properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal use ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                                   Amount of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional settings =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;st&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; floor / 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (with lift)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply.  Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sale features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band       A – H&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp;amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Brief Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bullet points ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Floors &amp;amp; rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Room name                A required field and the general name of a room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Virtual Staging ==&lt;br /&gt;
Virtual Staging allows you to create a new AI-generated version of an existing property photograph. This is most useful where a room is empty, sparsely furnished or you wish to show how a room may look when presented as a Bedroom, Living Room, Study or other layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use this feature, first upload and save your photographs as normal. On the Media tab, choose the photograph you wish to use, select the required room setup and click the Virtual Stage button. Standout will then create a new image and add it as a separate photograph. The original image is kept and is not overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Virtual Staging works best with clear, good quality photographs of empty or mostly empty rooms. Images with heavy clutter, strong reflections, poor lighting or objects blocking large parts of the room may produce less accurate results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that each Virtual Staging request has a charge. The cost shown on screen is applied per image generated. As the staged image is added as a separate photograph, you can then choose whether to keep it, re-order it, include it in a brochure or remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that any AI-staged image is checked before marketing to ensure it is suitable and represents the room appropriately. If required, keep both the original and the staged version so there is a clear record of the actual room and the dressed example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting a Video URL ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &amp;quot;Sign In&amp;quot; and enter your Google account information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &amp;quot;Upload video.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The video upload page should appear. Under &amp;quot;Select files to upload,&amp;quot; click &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &amp;quot;Publish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advertising ==&lt;br /&gt;
The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Portals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Board requests ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an advertising board is required for a property the &amp;quot;Board Required&amp;quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hit statistics ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings / offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interested parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exchange solicitor details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add additional information to the exchange invoice here, these details will be added to the exchange invoice to the solicitors when created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff viewings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are viewings, the information returned will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Time of visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Move and property customers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property information can now be shared with linked customers through [[My Move Customer Portal|My Move]]. The portal checks the authenticated contact&#039;s relationship with the property before showing customer information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the relationship and transaction, My Move can expose customer-appropriate information such as viewings, feedback, offers, progression, customer-visible documents, onboarding, AML status, secure uploads and viewing requests. Internal CRM notes and unrestricted property documents are not automatically exposed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To invite a customer, open their Contact record and use &#039;&#039;&#039;Send My Move link&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Landmark_Anti_Money_Laundering_Checking&amp;diff=760</id>
		<title>Landmark Anti Money Laundering Checking</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Landmark_Anti_Money_Laundering_Checking&amp;diff=760"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Landmark Anti Money Laundering Checking =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout integrates with Landmark for AML checks where the agency/branch is configured to use it. The important part of the workflow is accurate identity information before the order is submitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitors and contractors are exempt from this Standout AML workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Before starting a check ==&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm the customer&#039;s information is complete and accurate. Depending on the check/contact, Standout may require information including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* title;&lt;br /&gt;
* first/last name;&lt;br /&gt;
* date of birth;&lt;br /&gt;
* current residential address;&lt;br /&gt;
* house number/name, road, town/county;&lt;br /&gt;
* time at address;&lt;br /&gt;
* National Insurance number where used;&lt;br /&gt;
* driving licence where used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Check the information before placing an order.&#039;&#039;&#039; Incorrect identity/address data can result in failed checks or unnecessary additional orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Single contact workflow ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the Money Laundering/AML area.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review the populated identity/address fields.&lt;br /&gt;
# Correct any incomplete/incorrect information.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the contact if you are not ordering immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
# When satisfied, choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Place order&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Wait for/process the Landmark result.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review the result and supporting report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AML-Single.png|none|thumb|1100px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;&#039;&#039;Place order&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available, check mandatory information such as time at the address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multiple contacts ==&lt;br /&gt;
Where the contact information indicates two individuals, Standout can prepare multiple people for the AML order. Review each person&#039;s details separately before submission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Portal AML workflow ==&lt;br /&gt;
An eligible customer can provide onboarding information and AML consent through [[Customer Portal]]. If the branch is configured for Landmark, &#039;&#039;&#039;Start / refresh AML check&#039;&#039;&#039; hands the request into the same Standout Landmark workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before using it, the customer should have saved their date of birth, residential address/postcode and AML consent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer Portal does not make the customer responsible for the compliance decision. Staff should review the Landmark result in the normal Contact AML area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supporting documents ==&lt;br /&gt;
Customer Portal can also collect private identity/proof-of-address/source-of-funds documents. These uploads are not public property media. Staff review them from &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact → More actions → Customer Portal submissions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Generating the AML PDF ==&lt;br /&gt;
Where the Landmark result supports it, generate/store the report using the existing AML workflow so it is retained with the appropriate customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== If a check fails or needs review ==&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeatedly order new checks without understanding the reason. Check the identity/address data and follow your agency&#039;s compliance procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related guides ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Contacts Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the Customer Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Landmark Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landmark AML allows the automated antimony laundering checking of contacts entered in Standout. There are two exceptions – solicitors and contractors are exempt from AML checking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more about Landmark AML please follow [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services#keep-up-with-the-latest This] link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will examine the contact information provided and will try to create either one or two contacts for AML checking, depending on the title of a contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where a contact title doesn’t contact the “&amp;amp;”, Standout presumes the contact is a single person. When the title does include an “&amp;amp;”, two contacts are presumed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will try to populate the following fields for you to amend or populate, again depending on the information you have regarding your contact(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields used are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title                             this field is required, such as Mr, Mrs etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First Name                  their first name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Last Name                   their last name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
House Number           if their property has a number (limited to 6 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
House Name               if their property has a house name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Road                            the road&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
County                        the county&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date of Birth               their date of birth (if entered in the Contact details, this is the assumed value for the first contact).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Years/Months             you MUST enter (in contact details) how long they have resided at the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NI Number                  their National Insurance number (if entered in the Contact details, this is the assumed value for the first contact).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Driving Licence            their 16 digit driving licence number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IMPORTANT NOTICE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We cannot stress to you the importance of ensuring the data provided is accurate and entered correctly. We are not liable for the data used when placing an order(s) if you do not check and ensure data accuracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Failure to do so may result in you being charged for additional orders for AML checking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= AML checks started from My Move =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where the branch is configured for Landmark AML, an eligible customer can provide their identity information and AML consent through [[My Move Customer Portal|My Move]] and use &#039;&#039;&#039;Start / refresh AML check&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the check is submitted, the customer should save the required information, including date of birth, current residential address and postcode, and provide AML consent. The request then uses Standout&#039;s existing Landmark AML workflow; it does not create a separate customer-only AML record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff should continue to review the Landmark result and supporting information in the normal Contact AML area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Landmark Agency Configuration =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on configuring the Landmark AML system please look at the Landmark Agency Configuration section in the [[Administration]] guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact AML Checking – Single Contact =&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your contact that requires AML checking and choose the Money Laundering tab at the top of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AML-Single.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note – if you cannot see Place order you have not entered the Years and Months at the property. This is mandatory, please enter it in the Contacts details and then save the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click Save contact, Standout will save the entries in case you decide not to perform a check at that moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Checking fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Surname&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date of birth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
House Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
House Name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Road&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Town&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
County&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
National Insurance Number (optional – must be 9 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Driving Licence Number (optional – must be the first 16 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Placing an order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are satisfied that the above data has been entered correctly, click the Place order button. By default, if any required fields are invalid, you will see an error message and the order will not be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Placing An Order.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the order has been placed, the screen will change to&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Order Placed.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refresh your browser and you will obtain updates on the status of this AML check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whilst Landmark are processing the order, the standard screen should display&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Processing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion, when editing the contact or refreshing the browser, when you have a successful AML check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Generate PDF ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate PDF will allow you to either store a copy of the PDF in the Files tab of the contact (subject to configuration of either Dropbox or Google Drive). Or allow you to generate and download the PDF to your local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PDF in Files section ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PDF in files section.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filename for a AML check report will be named:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AML-Check-Report-First-Last.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact AML Checking – Multiple Contacts =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Aml Checking Multiple.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your contact(s) that requires AML checking and choose the Money Laundering tab at the top of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note – if you cannot see Place order you have not entered the Years and Months at the property. This is mandatory, please enter it in the Contacts details and then save the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click Save contact, Standout will save the entries in case you decide not to perform a AML at that moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Checking fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First person&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Surname&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date of birth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
House Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
House Name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Road&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Town&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
County&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
National Insurance Number (optional – must be 9 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Driving Licence Number (optional – must be the first 16 characters required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second person&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Surname&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date of birth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
National Insurance Number (optional – must be 9 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Driving Licence Number (optional – must be the first 16 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Placing an order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are satisfied that the above data has been entered correctly, click the Place order button. By default, if any required fields are invalid, you will see an error message and the order will not be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Place Multi Order.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the order has been placed, the screen will change to&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Order Placed.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refresh your browser and you will obtain updates on the status of this AML check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whilst Landmark are processing the order, the standard screen should display&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Processing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion, when editing the contact or refreshing the browser, when you have a successful AML check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Generate PDF ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate PDF will allow you to either store a copy of the PDF in the Files tab of the contact (subject to configuration of either Dropbox or Google Drive). Or allow you to generate and download the PDF to your local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PDF in Files section ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PDF in files section - m.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filename for a AML check report will be named:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AML-Check-Report-First-Last.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AML-Check-Report-First-Last-Second-Contact.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Sample PDF Report =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sample AML Report Page 1.png|none|thumb|1271x1271px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sample AML Report Page 2.png|none|thumb|1271x1271px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sample AML Report Page 3.png|none|thumb|1267x1267px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sample AML Report Page 4.png|none|thumb|1267x1267px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&amp;diff=758</id>
		<title>Diary Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&amp;diff=758"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Diary =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Diary is the shared record of who is doing what and when. Its value comes from booking appointments through the correct Standout workflow so the appointment remains linked to the relevant customer/property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use the right kind of appointment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use linked workflows for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* valuations;&lt;br /&gt;
* property viewings;&lt;br /&gt;
* rental inspections;&lt;br /&gt;
* staff visits;&lt;br /&gt;
* tasks/reminders where a task is more appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use a generic appointment for meetings or events that do not belong to a property/customer workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Booking a valuation ==&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended route is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open/create the property at the valuation stage.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Book Valuation&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the agreed diary date/time.&lt;br /&gt;
# Confirm the staff member and notification/letter options.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create the appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Sales Valuation to Instruction]] or [[Adding a new Rental Property]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Booking a viewing ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the property&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Book Viewing&#039;&#039;&#039; workflow so the diary entry knows which property and viewer it belongs to. See [[Booking and Managing Viewings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating another appointment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;+ New&#039;&#039;&#039; for a general appointment. Enter a meaningful subject, location, branch, staff member, category, start and end time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Private&#039;&#039;&#039; only where appointment details genuinely need to be restricted. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tentative&#039;&#039;&#039; when the time has not yet been confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Looking at the diary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Switch between day/week views and staff/team selections to plan workload. Include unaccompanied viewings where you need a complete view of property activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Office 365 integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Where a staff member is signed in to Office 365, Standout can create appropriate appointments in Outlook as well. Do not assume an Outlook entry replaces the Standout diary record; Standout remains the CRM record connected to the customer/property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Before finishing with an appointment ==&lt;br /&gt;
After it happens, record the outcome in the relevant workflow. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* valuation: confirm valuation/advice and next status;&lt;br /&gt;
* viewing: record feedback and any offer;&lt;br /&gt;
* inspection: record the result/action;&lt;br /&gt;
* meeting: add any important note/task arising from it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An appointment with no recorded outcome leaves the next member of staff guessing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Office 365 Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically, it will also be created in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diary actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print today                                                      print todays appointments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diary viewing options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day/Week                   viewing options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;- Today -&amp;gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
+ New              create a new appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(?)                    Mark as Tentative&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add an appointment ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subject                        name of the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location                      where is the location of the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For                               for which staff member&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start Date                    on which date (or start date)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start Time                   what time is the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Day                         if it is an all day event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
End Date                     on which date (or end date)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment - &#039;&#039;When creating a Contact Appointment, please read Note 1 below&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Private                         is this appointment private&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tentative                     is this appointment tentative&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                           close the appointment without saving&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have logged into Office 365, any appointment you create will also be created in your calendar. Please note, only edit appointments in Standout, edits will be reflected in your calendar. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, it will show in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) When creating a Contact Appointment (by editing a contact, choose More Actions / Create Appointment), Notes are used to inform the contact about the appointment. We would advise if this was to be used to discuss mortgage or rental information, that you enter a detailed description making the contact fully aware of why they&#039;ve an appointment with your agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating a Valuation Appointment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default letters are&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Book a viewing ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. If you&#039;re logged into Office 365, any appointments created, will also be created in your Outlook Calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the diary, the appointment will show as&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notifications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== My Move viewing requests ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Buyers and prospective tenants can request a preferred viewing date and time through [[My Move Customer Portal|My Move]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A My Move viewing request is written into the normal Standout diary as a &#039;&#039;&#039;tentative viewing appointment&#039;&#039;&#039; linked to the customer and property. Staff should review the appointment, confirm availability with the relevant parties and then confirm, rearrange or cancel the appointment using the normal Diary workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The customer sees the live appointment state in My Move after staff update it. This avoids maintaining a separate portal-only booking status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=756</id>
		<title>Contacts Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=756"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Contacts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact record is the centre of the customer relationship in Standout. It should answer: &#039;&#039;&#039;Who is this person, what are they trying to do, what have we agreed with them, and what is the next action?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact can have more than one role. For example, the same person may be an applicant looking to buy, a vendor selling their current home and a landlord of another property. Do not create separate records for each role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common contact workflows ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Registering a New Applicant]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Managing Applicant Requirements and Matching]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Booking and Managing Viewings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Sales Valuation to Instruction]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Landmark Anti Money Laundering Checking]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the Customer Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Communications Centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Before creating a contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
Search first. Use name, mobile/telephone, email or postcode. Duplicate contacts fragment notes, requirements, AML and transaction history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a new contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the appropriate contact type or types.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the customer&#039;s name and at least one reliable contact method.&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the address where relevant.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save/Create the contact.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue with the workflow that caused the contact to be created, for example requirements, valuation, viewing or landlord instruction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1200px|Create the contact with the information you know, then continue the relevant workflow.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact types ==&lt;br /&gt;
A contact must have at least one role. Typical roles include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Applicant / Tenant&#039;&#039;&#039; - looking to buy or rent.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchaser&#039;&#039;&#039; - buying a property.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Vendor&#039;&#039;&#039; - selling a property.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Landlord&#039;&#039;&#039; - letting a property.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Solicitor&#039;&#039;&#039; - acting for a party in a transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Contractor&#039;&#039;&#039; - carrying out maintenance/repair work.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rental guarantor&#039;&#039;&#039; - supporting a tenancy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a role may reveal additional tabs or fields relevant to that relationship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Keep communication details current ==&lt;br /&gt;
Telephone numbers and email addresses are used throughout Standout for appointments, letters, Customer Portal access and notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email addresses should be kept unique to the appropriate contact record. Where several email addresses are supported in a field, separate them as required by your agency&#039;s data-entry policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Record useful notes, not transcripts ==&lt;br /&gt;
A good CRM note records the outcome of the conversation and what happens next. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Spoke to Mr Smith. Still looking up to £325,000, needs three bedrooms and now has own property SSTC. Wants to view 14 High Street Saturday afternoon. Viewing booked for 14:30.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is more useful than a note saying only &#039;&#039;Called customer&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicants and purchasers ==&lt;br /&gt;
For somebody looking for property, the contact record is only half complete until their requirements are recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use [[Managing Applicant Requirements and Matching]] to capture budget, bedrooms, location, property type and other criteria. If they have a property to sell, record that position because it affects qualification and can create an [[Opportunity Finder]] opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Heat Rating&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used to indicate priority where your agency uses it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== AML and identity ==&lt;br /&gt;
Where AML is required, complete the customer&#039;s identity information accurately and use the [[Landmark Anti Money Laundering Checking|Landmark AML]] workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customers using [[Customer Portal]] can provide onboarding information and supporting documents, but staff remain responsible for reviewing the information and compliance result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements and live matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Requirements area describes what the applicant wants. Live matches show properties currently matching those requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not weaken requirements simply to produce more matches without discussing it with the customer. The record should reflect the customer&#039;s real search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files and documents ==&lt;br /&gt;
Store documents against the appropriate contact/property record so they can be found by other staff. Sensitive customer uploads from Customer Portal are kept private and are reviewed from &#039;&#039;&#039;More actions → Customer Portal submissions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Portal and Communications Centre ==&lt;br /&gt;
Where the contact has an email address, use &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Customer Portal link&#039;&#039;&#039; to invite them to the customer portal. See [[Using the Customer Portal]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer messages sent through Customer Portal appear in [[Communications Centre]] alongside portal and website enquiries. Reply from Standout so the answer is saved in the same portal conversation and the customer is notified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact → More actions → Customer Portal submissions&#039;&#039;&#039; for onboarding, buyer-ready information, secure uploads, AML history and portal appointment requests. The submissions page also shows the conversation and has &#039;&#039;&#039;Open in Communications Centre&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Things to check before leaving a contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Is the email/mobile correct?&lt;br /&gt;
* Is the role/contact type accurate?&lt;br /&gt;
* If they are looking, are their requirements current?&lt;br /&gt;
* If they have a property to sell, is that recorded?&lt;br /&gt;
* Is the latest meaningful conversation noted?&lt;br /&gt;
* Is there a task or appointment for anything promised later?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related guides ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Registering a New Applicant]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Managing Applicant Requirements and Matching]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Landmark Anti Money Laundering Checking]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Opportunity Finder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contacts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact Details =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a new contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic details ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact type ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact MUST have at least one option selected:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Contact Type&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Applicant / Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy or rent a property.&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchaser&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy a property&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to market their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to rent out their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contractor&lt;br /&gt;
|A contractor that undertakes repairs&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact information ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address  – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               Example - me@me.com, you@you.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heat Rating ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;.   Think of an old fashioned Hot Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Solicitor Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitors in Standout are a special type of contact as you can have many solicitors working for a company, and to ensure data consistency we ensure that the company name is only listed once at a post code (you can have the same company in many towns so we limit to only one company name at the same address).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You then add each solicitor person to the main solicitor record by entering their name etc on the contact, then in the company name search box enter the correct company name and press search, it will then populate the address if the company name already exists. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other information is then entered as the above section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff notes and information ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Move customer portal =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My Move gives customers secure access to information held in Standout and allows selected information to be supplied or maintained by the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where the contact has an email address, the Contact screen displays a prominent &#039;&#039;&#039;Send My Move link&#039;&#039;&#039; button immediately to the left of &#039;&#039;&#039;More actions&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this to invite the customer to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer information submitted through My Move can be reviewed from:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact → More actions → My Move submissions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the customer&#039;s relationship with the agency, My Move can provide property progress, viewings, feedback, offers, tenancy information, repairs, onboarding, AML/identity information, secure uploads, viewing requests and property requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[My Move Customer Portal]] for full guidance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Anti Money Laundering =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current ID details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Documents listed by default are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EEA member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           House or motor insurance certificate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council tax bill for the current year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Record of home visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current full UK driving licence (new style only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current Passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EE member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Firearms or shotgun certificates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           National identity card containing photograph of the client&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Identification reference (required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the identification reference of the document being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date Produced and photocopied (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Date on ID (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right to rent ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Requirements =&lt;br /&gt;
The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Match requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Customer self-service requirements in My Move ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customers can now create and maintain their own property requirements through [[My Move Customer Portal|My Move]]. These are the same live requirement records shown to staff in the Contact record, so there is no separate customer-only copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customers can create multiple named searches, update area/radius, price, bedrooms, type/style, new-build preference and must-have features, pause/reactivate searches and delete searches they no longer need. Standout runs the normal matching engine after changes and shows the customer a preview of current matches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The branch is notified when a customer creates, changes or removes requirements. If automatic property alerts are expected, ensure the contact is still marked &#039;&#039;&#039;Looking&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of each field is given below :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match name               a unique name for this requirement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build only            if they are interested in new build only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract type              For Sale / To Let&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Live matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Previously matched ==&lt;br /&gt;
When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Files =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Notes =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Viewings / Offers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Rental agreements =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Marketing / Privacy =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mailchimp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GDPR consent ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= History =&lt;br /&gt;
The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linked properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchasing Properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Searching Solicitors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Invoices =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark as Paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Solicitors – Solicitor details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= More actions =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The More actions sub menu for contacts offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create appointment&lt;br /&gt;
This option creates an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email. By default, Email Contact will be enabled in the Appointment form, this uses an email template located in Administration/Emails and is named &amp;quot;Contact appointment&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task&lt;br /&gt;
create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book a viewing&lt;br /&gt;
create a booking for the client to see a property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_Rental_Property&amp;diff=754</id>
		<title>Adding a new Rental Property</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_Rental_Property&amp;diff=754"/>
		<updated>2026-09-09T14:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Taking On a New Rental Property =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This workflow takes a landlord enquiry from first contact through valuation, instruction and launch to market.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 1. Search/create the landlord ==&lt;br /&gt;
Search Contacts first. If the landlord is new, create the contact with the Landlord role and record reliable communication details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 2. Create the rental property ==&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the basic information known from the enquiry:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* address;&lt;br /&gt;
* owner/landlord;&lt;br /&gt;
* property type/style;&lt;br /&gt;
* bedrooms/bathrooms/receptions;&lt;br /&gt;
* managed/rental mode where known;&lt;br /&gt;
* expected rent if already discussed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guided mode normally presents statuses in the order expected by the workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 3. Book the rental valuation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the property valuation workflow to create the diary appointment. Confirm the valuer and customer notification options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 4. Record the valuation ==&lt;br /&gt;
After visiting, update the valuation/rent advice and the property information gathered at the appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the landlord is deciding whether to instruct, capture the follow-up as a task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 5. Confirm the service level ==&lt;br /&gt;
When instructed, confirm the rental management mode used by your agency, for example Fully Managed or other available service levels. This affects which tenancy/financial/compliance workflows become relevant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6. Complete the property for marketing ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before making it available, complete:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* rent/deposit/fees as applicable;&lt;br /&gt;
* descriptions and rooms;&lt;br /&gt;
* photographs/floorplan;&lt;br /&gt;
* utility information where held;&lt;br /&gt;
* compliance/certificate information available at that stage;&lt;br /&gt;
* landlord details and instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 7. Launch the property ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the landlord has approved the particulars and the listing is ready, set the appropriate live/Available status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The property can then feed to the configured website/portals and be used for applicant matching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 8. Enquiries, viewings and offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Register prospective tenants, maintain rental requirements and use the linked viewing workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record feedback and offers in the property rather than only in notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9. Accepting a tenant ==&lt;br /&gt;
When the landlord accepts the tenant/offer, move into [[Creating and Starting a Tenancy]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Things to check before marketing ==&lt;br /&gt;
* landlord linked correctly;&lt;br /&gt;
* management mode correct;&lt;br /&gt;
* rent/deposit correct;&lt;br /&gt;
* bedrooms/type/style correct for matching;&lt;br /&gt;
* marketing media complete;&lt;br /&gt;
* known compliance issues identified early rather than at move-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related guides ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rental Property Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating and Starting a Tenancy]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rental Compliance and Inspections]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Managing Repairs and Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed screen and field reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections below restore the detailed operating instructions that were present in the earlier full version of this page. The workflow summary above reflects the newer Standout navigation and processes. Where terminology differs, use the current screen names shown in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting Started – Adding a new Rental Property ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has been designed to market and manage a property, either with No management whatsoever, rent collection or fully managed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guided Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
Standout by default works in guided mode. Meaning property statuses will be shown in the order of what is expected. For example, when a property is created the only status available would be “Pre Valuation”, in free mode, all properties statues are display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This part of the help system will describe the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a property on the system including assigning a new Landlord and all the tabs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
associated with a property (both Sales/Rentals).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Booking a valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accepting the valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Making the property available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating an applicant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Booking a viewing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Making an offer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a second tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating an agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How Financials work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tabs ====&lt;br /&gt;
Displayed above the property details, tab elements will be shown (and hidden) depending on a property contract etc. These tabs will allow different sections to be shown. We recommend that if you’ve amended information in a tab, press Save property before proceeding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Identification ====&lt;br /&gt;
The first area to be completed should be the property header information, this would be a unique reference (either type your own or allow the system to generate one), select the branch (if applicable), date the property can be marketed and if you’re going to market this property as a “Featured” property on your website and/or Portals, this can be changed at a later date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Address ====&lt;br /&gt;
Next enter the address details of the property, enter the Postcode of the property – if that Postcode exists in our database, either partial details will be populated or a drop down list of all the known addresses will be available for selection. Once selected, the data will be populated into the address fields – if you wish to edit these fields, you can do so at any time. If known/required, the local council can be selected for this property. If for any reason the address is not picked up from the post code then you will need to enter the full address manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you subscribe to the Zoopla portal for Display Address to be recognised by Zoopla, it must have 3 sections, by default this would be the “Road Name, Town, First part of the Postcode” ie “High Street, Town, M26”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mapping is an integral part of Standout and property searching, a properties Latitude and Longitude will be returned but, if you wish to move the marker on Google Maps, then use the Set Map button to move the marker to the required spot, clicking Close will then update the Latitude/Longitude accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above, the Streetview can also be amended but, please be aware that Google may not have mapped new houses/estates so a close location may have to be chosen until their views have been updated. Once you’re happy with the view of the property, click close to save the amendments. Additionally, you can turn this option off by settings the Include street view to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Owners ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Current Owners ====&lt;br /&gt;
As this is a new property, No owners selected will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add Owner ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you start typing a name (at least two characters), existing contacts within Standout will be displayed. To add a new contact, click the link “Create a new contact”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding a new landlord ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the landlords’ details in this new tab. The minimum amount of information needed to complete this task are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           First name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Surname&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Contact type – by default Landlord will be ticked (or checked)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Telephone or Mobile number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Email address – we believe this to be the most important as Standout can email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
contacts important letters, notices, and general emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           If the Landlord is a Company, enter the company name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Address – address where the Landlord resides or their business address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you’ve clicked Create contact, you can close this tab and return to the Add owners to enter the name details of your new landlord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are multiple landlords for a property, you will need to repeat this process. Where multiple landlords exist, a primary can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contract ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic information refers to the contract and property information. Contracts that can be chosen are “For Sale/To Let/Auction”. For this example, we’re choosing “To Let” (each option displays and hides options for that contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Managed options are “No/Rent Collection/Yes”, for this document, “Yes” will be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Class ===&lt;br /&gt;
Classification is the type of property being Let, “Residential/Commercial/Business”, “Residential” will be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== New Build ===&lt;br /&gt;
Pertaining to the property itself, is this classed as a New Build Property, either Yes or No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tenure ===&lt;br /&gt;
Is the Tenure of the building “Freehold/Leasehold/Commonhold/Share of Freehold/Flying Freehold/Share Transfer”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Residential type ===&lt;br /&gt;
A list of available residential property types, based upon the rules given by Rightmove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Property style ===&lt;br /&gt;
The type of property – “Detached/Link Detached/Semi Detached/Terrace”, based upon the rules given by Rightmove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Year built ===&lt;br /&gt;
The year (if known) the building was built.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bedrooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
How many bedrooms has the property? This is required!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bathrooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
How many bathrooms has the property? This is required!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reception rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
How many reception rooms as the property? This is required!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price ==&lt;br /&gt;
Should your Landlord already have prices for their property, this section will allow you to enter those figures. However, this section can be left blank until you’ve visited the property and completed a valuation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Currency ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you’ve configured Standout for multiple currencies, then you will have the option to choose, otherwise, it will be the standard (£ GBP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash ===&lt;br /&gt;
A message displayed on your website, generally on the main photograph of the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Let price ===&lt;br /&gt;
The amount of the rental&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Price qualifier ===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose from the list of available qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Post price message ===&lt;br /&gt;
A free text box to enter a message after the price on your website&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Let period ===&lt;br /&gt;
When will the rent be due – Weekly/Monthly/Quarterly/Annually/Per 4 Weeks/Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bond price ===&lt;br /&gt;
Known to some as a deposit – the bond should be paid by the tenant prior to their agreement start and held in your deposit scheme provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contractual arrangement ===&lt;br /&gt;
The options available are Joint Agency/Multiple Agency/Sole Agency” and are set whether the Landlord has the property marketed by yourselves and/or other agencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contractual fee split ===&lt;br /&gt;
When not a Sole agency, you can select how the fees will be split between the agencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Management Fee ===&lt;br /&gt;
How much will be charged to the Landlord for your services, either a percentage of the rent or a fixed fee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finders Fee ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you charge a Landlord for finding a tenant(s), then enter the fee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other agency name/Contractual details ===&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be displayed when not a sole agency for you to enter the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the above has been completed, click the Save property. Any errors will be shown at the top of the display and will need to be resolved before a successful save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Book Valuation ==&lt;br /&gt;
When editing your recently entered property, you can click the button, located at the lower right of the screen OR in the More actions menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clicked, you will be shown the Diary view, normally showing the current working week, choose the day/time when you will visit the property and double click the time slot – e.g. Wednesday at 6pm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The appointment form will be displayed, showing pre-populated information, including a small google map showing the property location. Should you wish to change anything, you can at this point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are NOT visiting but a colleague, you can choose their details in the drop down select for “For” otherwise, your name will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then choose whether to email the owner, if you do, click so a tick appears, they will receive an email confirming your visit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Letter selection&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you’ve booked a valuation, Standout has master letters available for you to create and either email or download/print. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Potential Listing Sheet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Valuation Appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;All the above can be duplicated and personalised in the Administration/Letter Templates section.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If none are required, click “Back to property without creating letter” at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property Status Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
As you’ve booked a valuation appointment, the property now has a status of “Awaiting Decision”. The only other status available is “Cancelled” should a Landlord wish not to use your services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Confirm/reschedule valuation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once you’ve valued the property, you can then use this option to either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Confirm the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Reschedule a new valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Confirming the valuation ===&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the property and choose either “Confirm/Reschedule valuation” at the bottom of the screen, or the matching button on the “More actions” menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contractual Agreement ===&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm the agreement – Sole Agency/Joint Agency/Multiple Agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Taken from the previous screen, this should match your previous choice – for this document, Yes is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Let period ===&lt;br /&gt;
Taken from the previous screen, this should match your previous choice – for this document, Monthly is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Initial Market Price ===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the valuation price that you feel is the market value, the minimum and maximum that you feel your agency would accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fee ===&lt;br /&gt;
The period fee your agency charges, which will be either a fixed fee or a percentage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finders fee ===&lt;br /&gt;
The fee you charge to the landlord for finding a tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bond price ===&lt;br /&gt;
The amount required to hold in the deposit scheme until the end of the tenancy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Valuation Advice ===&lt;br /&gt;
A text box to allow you to enter any additional information that you feel the landlord should be aware of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cancel ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to stop doing this and return to the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reschedule valuation appointment ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ignore all the above if the appointment did not occur and you wish to reschedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Confirm valuation ===&lt;br /&gt;
Save the information provided and return to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Letter Production ===&lt;br /&gt;
You will be offered the option to create a letter stating your valuation details, which allows you to amend, along with your agency terms and conditions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with all letters created in Standout, Document will download a Word document, Email will email it to your landlord (subject to an email address in the landlords’ details) or Both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not wish to create the letter, choose “&amp;lt;- Back to property without creating letters”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property Status Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
As you have now completed the above, the property status should now be set to “Valuation Confirmed”. Available statuses from this dropdown are “On hold/Available/Withdrawn/Valuation Confirmed”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional information prior to placing a property on the market ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before placing a property on the market, the more information provided regarding the property, the more likely a property will either be sold or let.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Various fields that are self-explanatory but to help:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can select entries from the drop-down list (items such as Children considered, Cul-de-sac, Double Glazed etc). This list is editable in the Administration part of the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                                      select from the list provided&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor               select from the list provided&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                                    select from the list provided&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assigned parking space(s)      enter the details regarding the space(s)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                                   enter the details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                            enter the details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space                         enter the details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Burglar alarm                          Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dishwasher                             Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smoke Alarm                          Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carbon monoxide alarm         Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area/Land area ===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the areas and Standout can convert between feet/Yards/Meter squared/Acres/Hectares&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
Rates information                   enter the details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band                     select from the list provided&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
Average gas cost                     enter the amount (if known)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average electricity cost          enter the amount (if known)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average water rates               enter the amount (if known)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
Ground rent fee                      if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Estate management fee         if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insurance fees                        if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Brief description&#039;&#039;          It&#039;s important to include a brief description, as this is often what is shown on your own website—and on portals—before someone clicks to view more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Full description           &#039;&#039; It may be thought that the full description will be used to enter a complete and thorough description of the property, rooms, outside and any other information pertinent to the property. And whilst this is true, we recommend using the Floors &amp;amp; rooms (see below for further information) to fully describe these rooms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bullet points                Add up to 20 bullet points regarding the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Floors &amp;amp; rooms           You can detail the property using floors and rooms, this will allow you to enter a floor or room name, the dimensions, a detailed description, up to four photographs and if required, for that room to be excluded from a brochure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Please note: photographs should be uploaded prior, in the Media tab.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Default rooms &amp;amp; floors can be created in “Administration/Branch/Default rooms” – such as Agency notes etc.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Ground floor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Front Garden (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Entrance hall (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Reception (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Dining room (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Kitchen (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Conservatory (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   First floor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Hallway (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Bedroom One (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   En-suite (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Bedroom Two (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Bedroom Three (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Bathroom (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Rear Garden (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Garden studio (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Garage (giving a description/photo/dimensions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   Agency Notes (place your notes in the description)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Directions &#039;&#039;      &#039;&#039;             By clicking the Directions button, Standout will calculate the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
directions from your branch office to property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location                      Enter any additional information regarding the property location,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   not entered in either the descriptions or rooms &amp;amp; floors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor View/Opinion Enter additional information provided by the landlord/vendor regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Media ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General media ====&lt;br /&gt;
Photographs                upload all the property photos and order them how&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
you’d like them to be viewed online&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Brochure Media          order the photos if different from above&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Floor plans                  upload floorplans into this section&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Floorplan URL              If the floorplan is hosted by a 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; party&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Video URL                   If you’ve a video on YouTube etc, paste the URL here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rental options ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shared Property                      this document does not go into HMO properties, see our&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
document “Marketing HMO properties”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rental Features           ====&lt;br /&gt;
Let type                       select from the drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furnished                    select from the drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum Term           enter the minimum length the landlord is prepared to accept&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract length           enter the contract length&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pets allowed                Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smokers considered    Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Benefits considered    Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sharers considered     Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent includes              Up to 1000 characters describing any additional inclusions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bills included               Self-explanatory Yes/No options included within the rental&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Property finance information ===&lt;br /&gt;
Mortgaged property               Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               If the landlord wishes for you to know this information, you&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               can record Mortgage Provider, term, price, date, monthly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
repayment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Utility providers ====&lt;br /&gt;
Gas/Electricity/Water             Select from a list of providers (if known)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory &#039;&#039;                               &#039;&#039; Add inventory items that will be in the property at the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               start of the tenancy recording  - room, item name, condition,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
quantity, value, additional notes and a photograph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repairs                                    Once a tenancy in active, you can report a repair and allocate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               a contractor. Selecting contractor type, contractor, date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
reported, report to, date passed to contractor, date to be&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fixed, date fixed, contact method (how the tenant reported&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the repair), details of the problem, additional staff notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(internal only), quoted cost, fixed cost, signed off by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
agent/tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring payments                These payments generate a payment request to the tenant,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and are intended to be used for things like extra car parking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
space, gardening services, window cleaning etc, automatically&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
applied to active agreements and can be seen in the Financials&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Service appointments             These are appointments for services that are booked for this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent reviews                           These are rent review appointments that are booked for this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificates ===&lt;br /&gt;
EPC                                          If the EPC is required, you can upload a certificate, otherwise,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               choose the EEC and EEP values to then Generate EPC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
certificate for the property. Also, when you place the expiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
date into Standout, a diary appointment will be created on that date reminding you about its expiry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional Certificates             enter the Certificate reference, expiry date and if you hold a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
copy, select copy held. As above, an expiry date reminder will&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;** Whilst there are other tabs, this guide will now skip them as they are covered in the property help guide **&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Placing the property on the Market ==&lt;br /&gt;
When your landlord confirms your valuation, you will need to edit the property to place the property online to start promoting:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Important fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
           Let price                      set the let price to what has been agreed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Status                          change to Available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Click the Save Property button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Letter production        a letter named “Property On Market” can be created, if&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required, and downloaded, emailed or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Depending on the date you have specified in “Date available” the property will either go live as of that date or, if the date is in the future, the property will not be uploaded to any website or portal until that date.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Money Laundering ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you’ve configured Money Laundering (Administration/Branch/Money Laundering provider) you will have 30 days to obtain relevant documentation (see Contact/Money Laundering to record identification).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Booking a viewing ==&lt;br /&gt;
When a potential tenant contacts your agency regarding the property, you will need to input their details onto Standout. Ensure that you choose “Applicant/Tenant”, enter their email and current address. This will ensure you can select them when booking the viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to book a viewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Contact           click More Actions / Book viewing / Quick search property / Choose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and if the Landlord confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Contact list      click Edit / Book viewing / Quick search property / Choose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and if the Landlord confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Property list     click Edit / Book viewing / Quick search property / Choose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                   the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and if the Landlord confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Property          click the button “Book viewing“ or “More actions / Book viewing” –&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
you can choose to either book a tenant viewing appointment or a staff viewing appointment (for yourself or another member of staff). Choose the tenant and the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant and if the Landlord confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings/Offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a viewing has occurred, you can update viewing details. To do this, edit the property, choose tab “Viewing / offers”.  For simplicity, we will continue with the tenant making an offer to progress the property to a Let state and creating a tenancy agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options available when updating a past viewing are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Book viewing&#039;&#039;                                      book a subsequent viewing (if required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Add viewer feedback&#039;&#039;                          if the viewer has given feedback, enter it here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Send feedback request email&#039;&#039;              send an email to a viewer asking for feedback&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Make offer     &#039;&#039;                                     enter offer details given by viewer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making an offer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the offer made by the viewer (for rentals this is usually the asking price), you can select their financial position, if there are any additional parties (their partners), offer conditions, our advice and then click Make offer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letter selection ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to the Make Offer being the same for Rental and Sales, Standout has two master letters aimed at Make Rental and Make Sales. Each one can be customised. Select Make Rental. Choose your letter format (Document/Email/Both).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accepting an offer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what your landlord says, you can Reject an offer, however, for this document we will be accepting the offer to proceed further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the “Accept” text and then click Ok to the popup confirmation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letter Production ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Letter production uses the “Offer Accepted” letter and will allow you to create a letter to all tenants and landlords, with the standard options to Document/Email/Both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property Status ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When accepting the above, the property Status will change to “Application Made”, options available are “On Hold/Available/Application Made/Let/Withdrawn”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating an Agreement ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once you’ve completed your due diligence (credit checking, money laundering etc) and are ready to create the agreement, edit the property and choose the Rental Agreements button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a new property, there will be no agreements, but as you let and re-let a property, a history of agreements will be displayed at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the agreement will be created for the tenant that you accepted with their offer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be able to create the Agreement details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement date                                  The date of the agreement (usual todays date)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reference                                           The reference you give to your agreement for this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           Property/tenant/landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                                           How often is rent due&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial period (Monthly)                      How long will the agreement be in place (12 = one&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
year)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start date                                            When will the tenant move in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
End date                                              Usually calculated using Start date and Initial period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rolling contract                                  Will the tenancy agreement stay in place after the End&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Auto Update Tenancy Address           Do you want Standout to replace the address held&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           on the tenant details with this property address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let price                                              How much rent for each period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                                          How much is required for bond (deposit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finders Fee                                         How much is the landlord paying for your agency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           Finding a new tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First Payment Due                              When is the first payment due (then occurs on that&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           day each period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment Terms                                   Zero by default, meaning if a payment is not received&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           on the day specified, it’s overdue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Days to pay landlord                           2 by default. How many days after receiving payment,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
will the landlord expect payment from your agency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send a reminder                                 How many days prior to rent being due, Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           can send an email and/or sms reminding the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send reminder by                               Disabled by default, select from the options available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           Note: SMS requires your account to be in credit, see Adminstration/SMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenancy Deposit Scheme                   Which TDS provider you use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deposit Scheme Reference                The reference number for this agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional Clauses                              Any additional clauses to this agreement, that differ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           from your standard agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial Inspection visit                          If someone from your agency is to visit the property,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           choose a date and staff member&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guarantor                                           If the tenant provides a guarantor, choose them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fee details                                           The fee is taken from the previous settings but if you&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           wish to change, then enter a new fee, select the type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           And when the fee is due.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letter production ==&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will now create the Agreement Tenancy, populated with all the information entered in your agreement. You may amend this document prior to creating a Document/Emailing or Both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be returned to the property agreement screen, now a new tab will be displayed called “Financials”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to recover from creating an incorrect agreement ==&lt;br /&gt;
Should you make an error with an agreement, you can perform one of two actions, End Agreement will end the agreement, leaving the agreement in your property/agreements history. Alternatively, if this agreement is no longer required or you do not wish for it to display, click “Delete Agreement” to remove it completely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Meter readings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can store the meter readings for the start and end of the tenancy, these can either be obtained by a staff member visit or the tenant relaying them to you, along with the providers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Financials ==&lt;br /&gt;
This tab will display three additional tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figures            in a spreadsheet type format, all the transactions associated with this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Breakdown      This breakdown counts and sums the various payment types. Note&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
that any discrepancy shown may be due to a pending landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
payment, and will disappear when financials are up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Graph              This graph will allow you to more easily see any irregularities with the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
transactions for this agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Figures ===&lt;br /&gt;
The first section shows an overview of the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Tenant owes you&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Landlord owes you&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Total agency earnings (excludes bank charges and VAT)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Total landlord payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Generating a statement for your landlord ===&lt;br /&gt;
When your landlord requests a statement, you can quickly and easily create one from here. Choose the Start date, End date or choose one of the Date helpers from the drop-down list and click Generate Statement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Report details ====&lt;br /&gt;
You will be shown the following columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Fee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Output options ====&lt;br /&gt;
Two options are then available to you are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Download Statement             downloads a copy for you in PDF format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Email PDF to contact              emails a copy to the landlord (subject to an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                           address being stored)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Record payment ==&lt;br /&gt;
When you either send or receive a payment, you record that payment in this section. Standout where relevant, will automatically assign the payment to any partial or unpaid items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The entry details are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Direction                     is the payment From or To&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Party                           who is the payment from/to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Payment method        how did they pay?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Payment type             Is the payment Rent/Other/Bond&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Amount                       How much is the payment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Date                            What date is on your bank statement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Reference                   What is the reference on your bank statement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Description                 Any additional information you wish to record&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Save button to confirm the above details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example: ===&lt;br /&gt;
An agreement created on the 13/10/2021, tenancy starting 15/10/2021, Bond of £495.00, Monthly rent of £595.00 with a Finder’s fee of £125.00 (plus VAT – if applicable) and monthly management fees of £60.00 (plus VAT – if applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to allocate the first month’s payments from the tenant and paying the landlord on the next working day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Entering payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
At the start of a tenancy, subject to a reliable tenant, you should enter the following details of payments from the tenant and payment to your landlord:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|Method&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Amount&lt;br /&gt;
|Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Ref&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|Bacs&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond&lt;br /&gt;
|495.00&lt;br /&gt;
|14/10/2021&lt;br /&gt;
|ABC123&lt;br /&gt;
|Payment from Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|Bacs&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent&lt;br /&gt;
|595.00&lt;br /&gt;
|15/10/2021&lt;br /&gt;
|ABC123&lt;br /&gt;
|Payment from Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
|Bacs&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent&lt;br /&gt;
|373.00&lt;br /&gt;
|18/10/2021&lt;br /&gt;
|LL-001&lt;br /&gt;
|Payment to Landlord – Rent minus fees&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you enter the first months rent payment, Standout will allocate the Rent Due transaction paid, it will also mark the Invoice to landlord paid, if there is an Invoice to landlord for the Finders fee, it will take that into account, therefore, prior to your final entry above, the transactions should display as:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Status&lt;br /&gt;
|Fee&lt;br /&gt;
|Amount&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Balance&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15/10/21&lt;br /&gt;
|Payment from Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|OK&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£595.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15/10/21&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice to landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Management Fee&lt;br /&gt;
|Paid&lt;br /&gt;
|£60.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
plus VAT of £12.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£595.00&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15/10/21&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent Due&lt;br /&gt;
|Paid&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£595.00&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;-£595.00&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14/10/21&lt;br /&gt;
|Payment for Bond&lt;br /&gt;
|OK&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£495.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13/10/21&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond request&lt;br /&gt;
|Paid&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£495.00&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;-£495.00&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13/10/21&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice to landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finder’s fee&lt;br /&gt;
|Unpaid&lt;br /&gt;
|£125.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
plus VAT of £25.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|£0.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Monday 18&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;, you pay your landlord the above amount, record it with:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Direction&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|Method&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Amount&lt;br /&gt;
|Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Ref&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
|Bacs&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent&lt;br /&gt;
|373.00&lt;br /&gt;
|18/10/2021&lt;br /&gt;
|LL-001&lt;br /&gt;
|Payment to Landlord – Rent minus fees&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of the 18-10-2021, the balances would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Tenant owes £0.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Landlord is owed £0.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Total agency fees £185.00 (excluding bank charges and VAT)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Total Landlord payments = £373.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Manually marking payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a transaction that has not been automatically allocated AND all the balances are £0.00, choose the Actions button, then select “Mark as paid”. This will mark this transaction as paid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Viewing options ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to either display or not display the following transactions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord / Tenant ====&lt;br /&gt;
                       From&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                       To&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                       Charges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                       Rent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                       All or None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transactions list ===&lt;br /&gt;
All the transactions listed with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Date                            Transaction date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Description                 A description of the transaction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Status                          Payment status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Fee                              If the transaction is a fee, with a description (if any) displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Amount                       Amount of the transaction (if not a fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Tenant Balance           Rolling figure of the amount owed by a Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Actions ===&lt;br /&gt;
           Mark Paid                    If the transaction has been paid but showing unpaid, use this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Dispute                        Mark the transaction in dispute&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Print invoice                Only shown on Invoices, creates a Letter based on Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice or Tenant Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Delete                         Delete the transaction if it is an error&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Breakdown ===&lt;br /&gt;
This breakdown counts and sums the various payment types. Note that any discrepancy shown may be due to a pending landlord payment and will disappear when financials are up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information show is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Type                            The transaction type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Count                          How many of these transactions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Sum                             A total of these transactions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Expected                     What is expected (if anything)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Difference                   What the difference is (if shown)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Graph ====&lt;br /&gt;
The graph is designed to allow you to see any irregularities more easily with the transactions for this agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diary – Rent reminders ===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an agreement is in place and started, Standout will automatically place an all day event reminder in your diary, on the day rents are due. If you open the appointment, you can quickly jump to property/contact/agreement as these will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout creates these reminders monthly on the last day of a month/first day of the month, for that month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=706</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=706"/>
		<updated>2026-08-30T20:04:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* How to use these guides */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Standout Property Manager Help =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Standout Property Manager knowledge base.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This help system is organised around the jobs an estate or lettings team needs to complete, rather than simply describing every button on each screen. If you are trying to work out &#039;&#039;what to do next&#039;&#039;, start with the workflow that matches the job in front of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New to Standout?&#039;&#039;&#039; Start with &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Standout - Quick Start|Standout Quick Start]]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Daily Negotiator Workflow|Daily Negotiator Workflow]]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sales workflows ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! I need to...&lt;br /&gt;
! Guide&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Register a buyer or applicant&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Registering a New Applicant]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Record what they are looking for and find matches&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Managing Applicant Requirements and Matching]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Arrange a viewing&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Booking and Managing Viewings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Record feedback after a viewing&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Recording Viewing Feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Take a valuation enquiry through to instruction&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Sales Valuation to Instruction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Prepare and launch a property to market&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Marketing a Property]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Record, negotiate and accept an offer&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Recording and Negotiating Offers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Manage a sale from offer accepted to completion&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Sales Progression to Completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lettings workflows ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! I need to...&lt;br /&gt;
! Guide&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Take on a new rental property&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Adding a new Rental Property]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Create and start a tenancy&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Creating and Starting a Tenancy]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Check certificates, inspections and compliance&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Rental Compliance and Inspections]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Record and manage maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Managing Repairs and Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Chase overdue rent&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Chase Outstanding Rent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| See all current tenants and balances&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Tenant List]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer service and prospecting ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Area&lt;br /&gt;
! Guide&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Give customers secure self-service access&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Using the Customer Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Full Customer Portal feature reference&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Customer Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Find lapsed, dormant and property-to-sell opportunities&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Opportunity Finder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Carry out Landmark AML checks&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Landmark Anti Money Laundering Checking]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Everyday tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Dashboard|Dashboard]]: what needs your attention today.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Diary Overview|Diary]]: appointments, valuations, viewings and staff availability.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Task List|Tasks]]: follow-ups that must not be forgotten.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Contacts Overview|Contacts]]: the customer record and how it connects to everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Property Overview|Property]]: the live record for a sales property.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rental Property Overview|Rental Property]]: tenancy, compliance, maintenance and finance.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Telephone wizard|Telephone Wizard]]: quickly turn a valuation telephone enquiry into a contact, property and diary appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to use these guides ==&lt;br /&gt;
Most workflow articles follow the same pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Before you start&#039;&#039;&#039; - the information you should have to hand.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;How to do it&#039;&#039;&#039; - the practical sequence in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;What Standout does next&#039;&#039;&#039; - automatic activity, status changes or notifications to expect.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Things to check&#039;&#039;&#039; - common omissions that cause problems later.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next step&#039;&#039;&#039; - where the process normally goes after this job is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For technical support, email &#039;&#039;&#039;support@issl.co.uk&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StandoutLogin.png|center|thumb|Standout Property Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:StandoutLogin.png&amp;diff=705</id>
		<title>File:StandoutLogin.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:StandoutLogin.png&amp;diff=705"/>
		<updated>2026-08-30T20:04:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;StandoutLoginPage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2021-03-25_at_16.27.57.jpg&amp;diff=704</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2021-03-25 at 16.27.57.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2021-03-25_at_16.27.57.jpg&amp;diff=704"/>
		<updated>2026-08-30T20:02:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Paul.Spann uploaded a new version of File:Screenshot 2021-03-25 at 16.27.57.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Standout&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=643</id>
		<title>The Dashboard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=643"/>
		<updated>2026-04-09T11:11:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Main area */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= What is the Dashboard? =&lt;br /&gt;
The dashboard is the main layout of Standout Property Manager, it is how the system is accessed and worked on, and can be broken down into the three areas as listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of your browser, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; displays options that are available on each and every screen displayed in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick explanation of these options are as follows:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notifications ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any notifications that require your attention, a counter will be display next indicating how many notifications you need to respond to. Notifications may be an upcoming appointment, a brochure that has been converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page Help ====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a popup help box that explains the current page or section that you have displayed. A link to the full help system should be displayed at the top, opening the full help system in a new browser tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Colleagues ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all your fellow colleagues, a green icon indicates that they’re currently logged in. If you want to send them (regardless of their logged in status) a sticky note message, click on the little yellow sticky note to see the following:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 02.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your message and then click Save for it to be displayed on their browser. You will see:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On your colleagues browser, a Notification will appear in their Toolbar:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When they go back to the Dashboard, your message will be displayed near the top right of their browser:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing your profile ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the information, configuration or settings for your Standout profile, click your name:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your profile will then open in a new browser tab. Please view our detail documentation regarding your profile configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Log Out ====&lt;br /&gt;
This simply logs you out of Standout and returns you to the Login screen. We recommend doing this when you’re away from your computer/device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
The left hand navigation is how we work woth elements of Standout Property Manager, each element is briefly described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo Area ====&lt;br /&gt;
The very top of the navigation bar will generally be your own agency logo, and is just used to make the sftware more personal to your own agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Quick Search ====&lt;br /&gt;
The quick serach can be used to search for a property or a contact, just type in a name, address, reference number, telephone number or email address then press enter, the system will then return anything that it thinks is valid for the information given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Dashboard will return you to the dashboard screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Tawk To =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Task list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Properties ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Telephone wizard ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add property ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Property list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Progress ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rental ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Bulk rental payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenant list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contacts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contacts to delete ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hot contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
Think of Hot contacts as your Hot Box, the list of contacts that you relly want to deal with, cash buyers etc, click [https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview#Heat_Rating here] for more information on Hot contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Online Manuals ===&lt;br /&gt;
You guessed, the online manuals is the Standout Wiki pages your reading now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administration ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Smart Dashboard&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Smart Dashboard gives you a flexible overview of your day in Standout. It brings together useful information such as recent properties, recent contacts, diary items, tasks, performance, and local weather in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the previous dashboard, the Smart Dashboard can be arranged to suit the way you work, so you can keep the panels most important to you where you want them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rearranging your dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can personalise the Smart Dashboard by moving the panels into the order that suits you best.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To rearrange the dashboard:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click and hold the panel you want to move.&lt;br /&gt;
Drag it to a new position on the dashboard.&lt;br /&gt;
Release it when it is in the place you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your layout will be saved, so the dashboard should continue to display in your chosen order when you return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows each user to organise the dashboard in the way that best matches their daily workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Office 365 Integration ====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link your account to Office 365. This allows appointments created in Standout to also appear in your Outlook Calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you log in, Standout will synchronise new and existing future appointments with Outlook. If you need to make changes to an appointment, you should always edit it in Standout, not Outlook, so that the synchronisation continues correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create an appointment for another member of staff, the appointment may still appear in your Outlook calendar, but the notes will make it clear who is attending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited listings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows properties that you have recently created or edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information displayed may include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
main photo&lt;br /&gt;
property reference&lt;br /&gt;
contract&lt;br /&gt;
status&lt;br /&gt;
price&lt;br /&gt;
display address&lt;br /&gt;
quick link to edit&lt;br /&gt;
for rental properties, a quick link to Agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see shortcuts to view All properties and All businesses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows contacts that you have recently created or edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information displayed may include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
title&lt;br /&gt;
first name&lt;br /&gt;
surname&lt;br /&gt;
contact type, for example Applicant, Tenant, Landlord, Vendor, Contractor, or Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick link is provided so you can open and edit the contact record directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see a shortcut to view All contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Today&#039;s appointments and outstanding tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows appointments and tasks that are assigned to you for today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking an item, you will be taken to the Diary, where you can view the full details and update them if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see quick actions such as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View diary – opens today’s Diary&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task – allows you to add a new task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Performance Chart ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel provides an overview of property performance over recent months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is designed to give you a quick visual summary of activity, such as properties that have been Let, Completed, or Withdrawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is intended as an at-a-glance performance view rather than a detailed report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Local weather ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel displays the local weather using the town or postcode held in your branch configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides a useful forecast for the current day and the coming days ahead. This can be especially helpful when planning property photography or viewings, as good weather can make a property more appealing.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=642</id>
		<title>The Dashboard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=642"/>
		<updated>2026-04-09T11:08:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Version x.x.x What’s New? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= What is the Dashboard? =&lt;br /&gt;
The dashboard is the main layout of Standout Property Manager, it is how the system is accessed and worked on, and can be broken down into the three areas as listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of your browser, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; displays options that are available on each and every screen displayed in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick explanation of these options are as follows:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notifications ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any notifications that require your attention, a counter will be display next indicating how many notifications you need to respond to. Notifications may be an upcoming appointment, a brochure that has been converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page Help ====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a popup help box that explains the current page or section that you have displayed. A link to the full help system should be displayed at the top, opening the full help system in a new browser tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Colleagues ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all your fellow colleagues, a green icon indicates that they’re currently logged in. If you want to send them (regardless of their logged in status) a sticky note message, click on the little yellow sticky note to see the following:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 02.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your message and then click Save for it to be displayed on their browser. You will see:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On your colleagues browser, a Notification will appear in their Toolbar:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When they go back to the Dashboard, your message will be displayed near the top right of their browser:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing your profile ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the information, configuration or settings for your Standout profile, click your name:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your profile will then open in a new browser tab. Please view our detail documentation regarding your profile configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Log Out ====&lt;br /&gt;
This simply logs you out of Standout and returns you to the Login screen. We recommend doing this when you’re away from your computer/device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
The left hand navigation is how we work woth elements of Standout Property Manager, each element is briefly described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo Area ====&lt;br /&gt;
The very top of the navigation bar will generally be your own agency logo, and is just used to make the sftware more personal to your own agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Quick Search ====&lt;br /&gt;
The quick serach can be used to search for a property or a contact, just type in a name, address, reference number, telephone number or email address then press enter, the system will then return anything that it thinks is valid for the information given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Dashboard will return you to the dashboard screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Tawk To =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Task list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Properties ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Telephone wizard ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add property ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Property list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Progress ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rental ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Bulk rental payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenant list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contacts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contacts to delete ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hot contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
Think of Hot contacts as your Hot Box, the list of contacts that you relly want to deal with, cash buyers etc, click [https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview#Heat_Rating here] for more information on Hot contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Online Manuals ===&lt;br /&gt;
You guessed, the online manuals is the Standout Wiki pages your reading now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administration ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Main area&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Office 365 Integration ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link Standout to your Office 365 account. This will allow appointments to be created in Standout AND in your Outlook Calendar. When you log in, Standout will synchronise appointments (both new and existing future appointments) into your Outlook calendar. If you wish to change an appointment, you must edit them in Standout and NOT Outlook so that synchronisation occurs. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, the appointment will be displayed in your calendar but a message in the notes will tell you that you are not the one attending the appointment.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited listings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays properties that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the main photo, the property reference, contract, status, price, display address, quick link to edit, if a rental a quick link to the Agreements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the right there are quick links to display All properties and/or All businesses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays the contacts that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the contact Title, First and Surname and what they are (e.g. Applicant, Tenant, Landlord, Vendor, Contractor, Solicitor). To the right is a quick link to edit their details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the right there are quick links to display All contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Today&#039;s appointments and outstanding tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays appointments and tasks that are assigned to you. By clicking on them, you will be taken to the Diary where the item will be displayed, allowing you to view, or if required, update the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the right, View diary will take you to the Diary for today. Clicking “Create a task” will allow you to create a new task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Performance Chart ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays those properties that have been Let/Completed/Withdrawn over the last twelve months. An informational display to display how successful your agency has been.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Local weather ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays the local weather based on town/postcode information provided in your branch configuration. The data displayed will be for the current day and the next seven days. If you want to view a different area, enter a postcode or town to be displayed. This area is displayed to assist in photographing a property, blue skies promote a property far greater than wet days – not that we’re able to change the weather!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=641</id>
		<title>Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=641"/>
		<updated>2026-04-05T07:45:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Media */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin with, the following should be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property reference     A unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         Only shown if you have multiple branches, this will then allow you to choose a branch accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date available             When the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Latitude and Longitude ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sitting Tenants ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basics are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract                          For Sale / To Let / Auction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build                    Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenure                          Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Let options ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commercial options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial type :        Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Business Sales ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business name            the name of the business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – To Let properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal use ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                                   Amount of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional settings =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;st&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; floor / 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (with lift)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply.  Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sale features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band       A – H&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp;amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Brief Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bullet points ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Floors &amp;amp; rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Room name                A required field and the general name of a room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Virtual Staging ==&lt;br /&gt;
Virtual Staging allows you to create a new AI-generated version of an existing property photograph. This is most useful where a room is empty, sparsely furnished or you wish to show how a room may look when presented as a Bedroom, Living Room, Study or other layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use this feature, first upload and save your photographs as normal. On the Media tab, choose the photograph you wish to use, select the required room setup and click the Virtual Stage button. Standout will then create a new image and add it as a separate photograph. The original image is kept and is not overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Virtual Staging works best with clear, good quality photographs of empty or mostly empty rooms. Images with heavy clutter, strong reflections, poor lighting or objects blocking large parts of the room may produce less accurate results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that each Virtual Staging request has a charge. The cost shown on screen is applied per image generated. As the staged image is added as a separate photograph, you can then choose whether to keep it, re-order it, include it in a brochure or remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that any AI-staged image is checked before marketing to ensure it is suitable and represents the room appropriately. If required, keep both the original and the staged version so there is a clear record of the actual room and the dressed example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting a Video URL ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &amp;quot;Sign In&amp;quot; and enter your Google account information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &amp;quot;Upload video.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The video upload page should appear. Under &amp;quot;Select files to upload,&amp;quot; click &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &amp;quot;Publish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advertising ==&lt;br /&gt;
The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Portals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Board requests ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an advertising board is required for a property the &amp;quot;Board Required&amp;quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hit statistics ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings / offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interested parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exchange solicitor details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add additional information to the exchange invoice here, these details will be added to the exchange invoice to the solicitors when created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff viewings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are viewings, the information returned will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Time of visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=640</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=640"/>
		<updated>2023-02-03T14:50:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Data synchronisation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts synchronisation&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data Stats.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  &#039;&#039;&#039;Xero synchronisation&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Data_Stats.png&amp;diff=639</id>
		<title>File:Data Stats.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Data_Stats.png&amp;diff=639"/>
		<updated>2023-02-03T14:50:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Data Stats&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=638</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=638"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T16:31:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Configuring Xero for Standout Integration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration, this MUST be completed before you set up the link in Standout!!!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the the App Accounts fields (the ones in italic below) are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;Xero Client ID&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;Xero Client Secret&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;Xero Webhooks Key&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=637</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=637"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T12:10:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the the App Accounts fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;Xero Client ID&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;Xero Client Secret&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;Xero Webhooks Key&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=636</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=636"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T12:09:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the the App Accounts fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=635</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=635"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T12:08:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=634</id>
		<title>Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=634"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T13:13:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Properties */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin with, the following should be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property reference     A unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         Only shown if you have multiple branches, this will then allow you to choose a branch accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date available             When the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Latitude and Longitude ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sitting Tenants ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basics are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract                          For Sale / To Let / Auction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build                    Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenure                          Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Let options ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commercial options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial type :        Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Business Sales ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business name            the name of the business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – To Let properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal use ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                                   Amount of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional settings =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;st&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; floor / 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (with lift)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply.  Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sale features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band       A – H&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp;amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Brief Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bullet points ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Floors &amp;amp; rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Room name                A required field and the general name of a room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting a Video URL ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &amp;quot;Sign In&amp;quot; and enter your Google account information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &amp;quot;Upload video.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The video upload page should appear. Under &amp;quot;Select files to upload,&amp;quot; click &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &amp;quot;Publish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advertising ==&lt;br /&gt;
The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Portals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Board requests ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an advertising board is required for a property the &amp;quot;Board Required&amp;quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hit statistics ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings / offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interested parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exchange solicitor details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add additional information to the exchange invoice here, these details will be added to the exchange invoice to the solicitors when created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff viewings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are viewings, the information returned will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Time of visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=633</id>
		<title>Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=633"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T10:13:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Interested parties */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin with, the following should be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Latitude and Longitude ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sitting Tenants ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basics are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract                          For Sale / To Let / Auction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build                    Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenure                          Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Let options ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commercial options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial type :        Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Business Sales ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business name            the name of the business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – To Let properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal use ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                                   Amount of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional settings =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;st&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; floor / 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (with lift)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply.  Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sale features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band       A – H&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp;amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Brief Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bullet points ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Floors &amp;amp; rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Room name                A required field and the general name of a room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting a Video URL ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &amp;quot;Sign In&amp;quot; and enter your Google account information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &amp;quot;Upload video.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The video upload page should appear. Under &amp;quot;Select files to upload,&amp;quot; click &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &amp;quot;Publish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advertising ==&lt;br /&gt;
The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Portals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Board requests ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an advertising board is required for a property the &amp;quot;Board Required&amp;quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hit statistics ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings / offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interested parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exchange solicitor details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add additional information to the exchange invoice here, these details will be added to the exchange invoice to the solicitors when created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff viewings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are viewings, the information returned will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Time of visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=632</id>
		<title>Administration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=632"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T09:58:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch services */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Agency configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency =====&lt;br /&gt;
Company logo             add to the system an image of your company logo for use within the Standout system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Year start =====&lt;br /&gt;
Financial year start     when the Agencies financial year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holiday year start       when the Agencies holiday year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default local council   select your local council from the drop down list, you can press backspace and start typing the name to find the council name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email server configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
To help with the initial configuration of your email server, a new option “Default Services” has been added.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email Server Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the initial settings for email services from:Gmail / Hosted Exchange by ISSL / Office 365 / Other mail provider&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above can be ignored if your IT support has given you details to populate the email server configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout Property Manager can integrate with your own Email server, this will then send all emails other than client match emails via your own mail server, client match emails will still be sent by the ISSL server as that can handle bulk mail. This will allow you to control which email server sends emails from Standout to your contacts. Either leave this option or enable it to use your own email server. Your IT team should be able to provide you with email server details for Standout to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server Enabled                        ticked, this will allow configuration of your own Email Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email host name                     normally the smtp address (eg smtp.yourdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port number                           normally 465 or 587 (gmail etc is 587)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Protocol                                  Normally TLS but can be SSL or None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Username                               Username of the account (can be an email address)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Password                                Password for the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From name                             Text for the account (can be your Agency Name)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From address                          Email address of the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send test email                       Send a test email using the above settings (saving the agency is not required for testing, only to save permanently)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email branding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to upload images for an email header and footer, change colour schemes and when sending a property match email, enter additional text at the top of the email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Status Overrides ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Override.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to override a status on your website and portals. The main reason for this override is whilst a sale goes through, and has the possibility of falling though, allowing the agency to continue gathering potential customer details during the sale process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Privacy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Configure the amount of time to keep details on the system. This screen allows you to determine how long you will keep various forms of data. This decision is yours and any periods should be updated in line with your privacy policy and company terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Telephone privacy statement ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This statement will be displayed alongside a telephone consent checkbox on contact details, allowing it to be read out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recently introduced, by default, “Force GDPR conformation” has been added to Standout. This option will force the Marketing/Privacy/Manual consent option to be displayed when a member of staff adds a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An agency should place their own Telephone privacy statement in the above box. This will be displayed each time a staff member creates a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if you are entering a Solicitor, you can instruct your staff member to ignore this option and move left to the Contact details tab and enter the Solicitor details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data retention limits ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vendors ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Buyer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlords ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenants ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Marketing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Key ====&lt;br /&gt;
To allow you to email multiple contacts, the Marketing tab allows you to link Standout to MailChimp. All the details required are linked from this page to MailChimp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Lists ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of how lists are shown can be seen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File Storage.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will require you to subscribe to either FTP File Server, Dropbox or Google Drive for the storage of documents. These documents are used in both Letter and Email templates to send agency documents to your contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &#039;&#039;&#039;ISSL can offer 2Gb of free disk space, please contact us at support@issl.co.uk and we can set this up for you. Once you get to the limit, we offer cheaper rates than the other services.&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum size of each file you can upload is 10Mb. The maximum space is dictated by your storage provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please be aware, large files connected to an email may stop the contact from receiving your email if their email provider has a limit on the size of an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoices – currently unavailable ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout is linked to our accounting system, all invoices that have been issued to your agency can be viewed from this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tawk to API ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tawk To.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can show and link the Tawk To chat system so that if installed on your website, you can receive notifications that a client wishes to chat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you log into Tawk to then choose the icon on the left side which reads “Add ons”, choose Webhooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the “+Create Webhook” button and you will then need to copy the link given in the Tawk to settings and place it into “Your Request Endpoint URL” and then copy and paste the Secret Key into the Tawk To Settings, click Save to update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to amend each staff member and go to Permissions and tick the Permission “Use Tawk.To Interface” for them to be able to use Tawk to within Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the first Branch created is called Head Office (you can rename this). When in trial or Landlord mode, only one branch can be configured. Once signed up, an agency can add further branches.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Branch List.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new branch, the procedure is identical to the details in Edit Branch,.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit Branch ===&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a branch, just click the Edit Branch on the right hand side.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit Branch Button.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact Information ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch Name              the name of this Branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                     the postcode of this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                       the full address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                       the country where the branch resides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Telephone Number    the telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fax Number                the fax number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email address              the main email used for this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Latitude                       the Latitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longitude                    the Longitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set map                      move your branch latitude/longitude if does not display correctly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comp. Reg. No.          the Company Registration Number for your agency/branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legal entity name       the Legal entity name of this Agency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you’ve added all the staff in your Agency, you can assign those Staff members to Manager roles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default rooms ====&lt;br /&gt;
To optimise property entry, it Is possible to create default rooms and floors. These rooms/floors will appear (if chosen to be added) at the end of your floors/rooms within a property. One of the popular options for default rooms is to add Agent Notes and Disclaimers to a property and saves the re-entering of room information. Additionally, as with floors/rooms in a property, these can be excluded from being included in a brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Branch services =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch on hold           if you either close a branch or temporarily stop operating from a branch, this will place that branch on hold so no properties can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales                            this branch caters for Sale properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rentals                        this branch caters for Rental properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Auction                       this branch caters for Auction properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential                  this branch caters for Residential classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial                 this branch caters for Commercial classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business sales             this branch caters for Business sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Applicable countries =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select which countries this branch deals with &#039;England&#039; is selected by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default local council =====&lt;br /&gt;
This dropdown selection will default to the default local council in the Agency settings. However, if this branch does not fall within this remit, you can then choose an alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Properties =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property status mode this allows all properties to either operate by Free or Guided (default) modes. In Free mode, you select the Property status as you progress through either the Sale or Rental. In Guided mode, the system will allow you to only choose from a chosen set of statuses and will change as you progress through the Sale or Rental process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Countries can be configured so that if you only operate in England, then you can choose Not displayed otherwise you can choose Displayed or Mandatory that a country is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable EPC is when you either wish to enter an EPC for a property but, if this is not an requirement, then EPCs can be turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Force money laundering checks will only allow you to proceed with a property only when those parties have supplied money laundering documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flag properties that have not been viewing in the past number of days allows you to set a number of days so that agents are aware of properties that are not gaining interest by potential buyers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Diary =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you wish to ensure that by default emails are sent to viewers, owners and tenants but can be either turned off here or when creating an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fees =====&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee                              the fee default amount (1% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee type                      either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee                   the rental fee default amount (0% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee type           either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default finders fee                  a monetary figure (£0.00 default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply fees                               when the agencies management feeds should be applied&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On due date                when the due date occurs, fees are raised automatically&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On payment                when the tenant pays, then the fees are raised&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Currency =====&lt;br /&gt;
An agency can set up all the agency fees that they accept, by default GBP/EUR/USD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letters =====&lt;br /&gt;
When letters are produced, who letters are sent from, either the Property Manager, Branch Manager or that user that is logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Language =====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can convert text to French/German/Spanish instead of English &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tax ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you enter your VAT number, Standout will allow you to enter the VAT rate and the effective Date, this will allow the system to calculate the correct VAT amount for each applicable transaction. If the rate changes, then Standout will use the current VAT rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rental ====&lt;br /&gt;
Rental fee information           the agencies legal information regarding rental properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will be displayed on your website and to portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repairs                                    If your website was created by ISSL recently, it may have the ability for tenants to report repairs directly. If this is available and enabled, the below staff member will be notified whenever a new repair is reported by a tenant, in addition to it appearing in the list of repairs for their property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SMS ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send SMS text messages to mobile numbers but, an Agency must purchase credits for this to operate. You will be required to enter an SMS sender number (usually your office number) and a tag line for the end of your message. Also, if enabled, Standout can text those contacts who are viewing a property, will receive a reminder 2 hours prior to an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advertising board request ====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has two methods for board companies, either the standard email service, or Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency Express =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Express.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you sign up with agency express you can obtain an API code from them, just put that (Copy and Paste) into the Agency Express API field, you will also get a Branch Code, again copy and paste that into the Branch code field and select the other options as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Standard Email Board Company ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Board Company.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board company contact details =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the required information primarily the board company email address where the automated emails will be sent to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale statuses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letting statuses =====&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board removal =====&lt;br /&gt;
When a board should be removed (after x days).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Applicable countries ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Applicable Countries.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default England is selected for all companies and offices, however you should ensure that this is selected correctly according to the countries that you sell properties in, just tick or untick as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affiliates ===&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can send the appropriate information to either Brief Your Market or Move with Us should you have a subscription with either of these companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proactive Actions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Proactive actions have been created to automate actions to improve efficiency of your agency. By setting up actions you are able to initiate reminders, communications with a property vendor or landlord without having to manually perform this. For example, you might want to send an email to a vendor after 7 days of their property going on the market to reassure them you&#039;re doing everything to find a buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Creating a new action&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - A description of the action (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable/Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this task is Disabled, it will not be processed by Standout (if you want to suspend this for the time being)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Residential/Commercial/Business&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose which class of property to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales/Lettings&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose if this action is to perform against a sales property or a rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;At status change/After status change&#039;&#039;&#039; - &amp;quot;At status change&amp;quot; will be processed every time a property is edited and those actions which are applicable, will be processed. &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; will be processed by a daily job that will run in the early hours of a morning. Therefore, when selecting a &amp;quot;Contact day&amp;quot; you will NOT be able to choose &amp;quot;Immediately&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Specific status&#039;&#039;&#039; - Which status do you want to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Method&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6 methods are currently available: &#039;Create a task&#039;, &#039;Diarise telephone call&#039;, &#039;Diarise send email&#039;, &#039;Diarise send SMS&#039;, &#039;Email (automated)&#039;, &#039;Email (staff member)&#039;, &#039;SMS (automated)&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact day&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to perform this action immediately or up to 28 days in the future. Note: Immediately will NOT be available if &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact time&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific time for the diary appointment to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Staff member&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to assign any the action to (be it an task/appointment or a signature on an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Send to&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to send the email or SMS to - Vendor/Landlord or Buyer/Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Task name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful task subject line when creating a task for a staff member (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Subject&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an email method is chosen, this appears for you to complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Body&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text to an email. Variables can also be used and are:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Current variables are&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{RE} - The Display Address for the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{REF} - The property reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{ADDRESS} - The properties full address (seperate lines)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Vendor variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSalutation} - The vendor name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTitle} - The title of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorName} - The first name(s) of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSurname} - The surname of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTelephone} - The vendors telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorMobile} - The vendors mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorEmail} - The vendors email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Landlord Variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSalutation} - The landlords name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTitle} - The title of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordName} - The first name(s) of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSurname} - The surname of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTelephone} - The landlords telelphone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordMobile} - The landlords mobile number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordEmail} - The landlords email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buyer variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSalutation} - The buyer name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTitle} - The title of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerName} - The first name(s) of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSurname} - The surname of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTelephone} - The buyers telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerMobile} - The buyers mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tenant variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSalutation} - The tenant name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTitle} - The title of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantName} - The first name(s) of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSurname} - The surname of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTelephone} - The tenants telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantMobile} - The tenants mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Staff variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{StaffMember} - The name of the staff member dealing with this property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{AgencyName} - The agency name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeAddres} - The address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeTelephone} - The telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeEmail} - The email address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Formatting variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{b} - Start to bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/b} - End of the bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{u} - Start to underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/u} - End of the underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{i} - Start to italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/i} - End of the italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Delete action&#039;&#039;&#039; - allows for you to delete the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039; - cancel editing the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create/Update action&#039;&#039;&#039; - creates or updates the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once saved, you will be shown a list of existing actions. You have the options to edit or delete an action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Money laundering provider ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 options for money laundering provider either none (you will do all the checks manually yourself) or [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark] where they will do all the checking for you.[[File:Money Laundering Provider.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If None is selected you have two options available Force money laundering checks, which basically reminds you if you have not entered any identity check information and email chase up, enabling this option will send reminder emails to those contacts that are still required to provide you with Money Laundering documentation. By enabling this option, a staff member is required to be selected and if required, the email can be amended to your own wording.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landmark AML ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Landmark will enable the fully automated Anti Money Laundering verification system from [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you sign up with Landmark tell them you are using Standout Property Manager From ISSL they will provide you with an Account ID, copy and past that into the Account ID field and save, from that point on your are able to automatically AML check contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default the staff list shows all staff that are enabled, you can change this list to show all inactive staff by clicking on the filter by status drop down, from here you can select active or inactive staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you want to restore a staff member that you have made inactive  swap to the inactive list, then click restore to the right of the person that you want to make active again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Restore User.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that if a member of staff leaves you deactivate them from the system as soon as they walk out the door for the protection of your data, as they can login from anywhere unless you have ip restrictions in place.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add / Edit a member of staff ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff Screen 1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Most fields here are self explanatory please remember if you have multiple offices to assign the staff member to the correct office with the correct privileges .Once completed  data entry of this tab, please press Create staff before moving to the next tab to ensure that there will be no data loss or entry errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Permissions ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 1.png|none|thumb|1131x1131px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 2.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 3.png|none|thumb|575x575px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can allow or disallow staff access to parts of the Standout system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The permissions screen is split into logical sections to help you assign the correct level of access to each person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click any of the above options, they will automatically update, therefore, you do not need to click Save staff on this tab once you have completed your edits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email Preferences ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this section to create an email signature for automated emails as you are legally obliged to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email access ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a staff’s email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a history of what a staff member has had logged whilst using Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Login locations ===&lt;br /&gt;
When staff log in, their IP address is recorded, if a member of staff is working out of the office and shouldn’t be, this will allow you to block the address in Agency / Security.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Holidays Administration Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configuring holidays is simple, there are the following two options in Administration/Staff/Staff member. Then, select the Permissions tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifically, these are the two settings that need to be configured, with ticks, that member of staff can do both, without those, are required to request holidays.&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration Warning===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no one has “Approve own holidays” in a branch, when a staff member attempts to Request a holiday, they will see this error:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To fix this issue ensure the above has been configured.&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
Within Staff details / Basic details, there is now the ability to store the staff members holiday allocation, this is in number of days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with their allocation, please enter their workdays so the system knows which days they work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teams ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teams.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above example screen shot shows the general team selected and all staff members are added to that team.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the General team is created and all staff members automatically get added to this team when they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a team click Edit then add or remove staff as required and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new team, enter the Team name, choose Staff and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Feeds.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to send data to various outbound data feeds to portals etc, and update the details for those you are subscribed to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of outbound data feed :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standard Feeds (Rightmove, On the Market, Zoopla etc) and None Standard feeds none standard feeds need extra information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All feeds are edited by simply clicking on the Edit button as per the below example :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Edit link is pressed it expands down to show the below :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices 2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill in the feed codes supplied by the portal company in the spaces provided, note you may have different codes for each type of property, also some types may not appear ie if you do not do commercial property then that option will not be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Automatically include new listings determines if any new property you enter is automatically sent to the portal, if not selected you need to manually enable the property to send on the advertising tab within each property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have input the code supplied, press Save Details and you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feed will automatically start. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second type of feed requiring more information is shown below, again the portal will supply the extra information.[[File:FTP Feeds.png|none|thumb|999x999px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Portal companies will supply you with their feed information, certain portals will require FTP details to be entered, others will already contain FTP settings, some using real time data feeds (Rightmove, Zoopla etc) do not need this information. Some portals will also have separate feed codes for each branch so ensure you check that the feeds are set up correctly as per the portal requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All portals will have feed codes for the types of properties that will be required to populate the above fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Security ==&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to define known IP addresses to restrict logins to this system. If no IP Addresses are listed, staff can log in from any machine. Adding IP Addresses to this list will restrict where staff can log in from, and increase the security of your data.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Security.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above screenshot shows that Carl Smit is only allowed to access Standout Property Manager from the ip address shown, this restricting this person to only login from the office (or any known location)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IP formatting:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV4 addresses follow the format N.N.N.N where N is a number from 1-255&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV6 addresses follow the example 2001:0db8:0a0b:12f0:0000:0000:0000:0001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property features ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Features.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to add new items that have not been defined in the “Features” list within Properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if you sell properties that quite often have canal at the rear of the garden then you could add a feature of &#039;Canal Mooring&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property Progression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add marker ==&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to add a progression marker that does not already exist and for a range of contracts/classes and contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact Sources ==&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has some default advertising sources configured. However, should you wish to record a specific advertising campaign or advertising outlet not listed, it can be added in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Brochure Templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
By default, Standout has two brochures available. However, these can be amended for your agency. ISSL offer a service to create a brochure for your agency (at a cost), otherwise, you may download a template, amend it and upload it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new brochure, click Duplicate on either of the above defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing a brochure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     a meaning full short description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a full description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a complete list of what variables to use within your brochure, click “Template variables available to use on this brochure” and a comprehensive list and descriptions will be show. If needed, copy/paste this information into a new Word document to either save as a reference and/or print out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Download Microsoft Word template” to download and edit the document. When completed, click on Choose File, select the template that you’ve edited and then click&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save Brochure. The original brochure will now be replaced with the new version. To test, open a property, click More Actions then Generate Brochure, if you then save the property with a generated brochure, Standout will create a PDF version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letter templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout offers a master set of letters when communicating with contacts. Every letter can be duplicated, amended and then used by Staff. We recommend letter names that are meaningful and not ambiguous, especially if duplicate letters are created with only minor differences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you’ve attached Agency files to be sent with your letters, the number of letters attached will be shown in the letter description “(and has ‘x’ agency file(s) attached)”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Master letters are available to preview and Duplicate but not Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a letter to that you wish to duplicate and click “Duplicate”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit letter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Copy settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a document already configured (with Page/Header/Footer settings, you can use this option to copy these. Click Copy settings from, select your letter and then click Copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful Letter name and description for this letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
These settings allow you to control the margins on the page and the default font size to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Header ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Letter content ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you configure the content of the letter and place the variables in your letter which will be converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Design Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the “Help on designing letter templates” a list of sections and variables should be displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is broken into three sections - Section variables, Mandatory variables, Optional variables (usually added variables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency files ===&lt;br /&gt;
Once files have been uploaded in the Agency files section, you are able to then choose files to be sent with these letters, should you choose the Email option and are attached automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once completed click on Save letter to save these changes and return to the Letters list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with Letters, emails have Master copies that you are unable to edit, to make your own version, click “Duplicate” to create a new document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing Email ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on Edit on the right hand side to open the template details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     the name of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a detailed description of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Template Code                       the wording of your email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show merge fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agency files                             the files that can be attached to an email sent from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete                                     Delete this template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cancel                                     Cancel any alterations and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save email                               Save the email and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diary categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to create new categories for the diary and also allows the category colour to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Match location updater ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Match Location Update.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to enter an area, then, if you believe it should be altered, you can then send a request to our support team for it to be inspected and either authorised or rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proposing a new location ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propose New Location.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Nearby location          if the location can’t be found, enter one that is nearby as a starting point and then amend as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name your location    Name the location of the area you are suggesting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propose location         click this button to send the location to support for their review.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Landmark Agency Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landmark should provide you with four configuration keys, these are to be stored in Administration / Branch / Money laundering configuration&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to input the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
API or Ocp Apim Subscription Key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered (or copy/pasted), then save the branch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to log out and log back into Standout for these settings to allow AML checking.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=631</id>
		<title>Administration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=631"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T09:58:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Default rooms */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Agency configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency =====&lt;br /&gt;
Company logo             add to the system an image of your company logo for use within the Standout system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Year start =====&lt;br /&gt;
Financial year start     when the Agencies financial year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holiday year start       when the Agencies holiday year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default local council   select your local council from the drop down list, you can press backspace and start typing the name to find the council name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email server configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
To help with the initial configuration of your email server, a new option “Default Services” has been added.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email Server Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the initial settings for email services from:Gmail / Hosted Exchange by ISSL / Office 365 / Other mail provider&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above can be ignored if your IT support has given you details to populate the email server configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout Property Manager can integrate with your own Email server, this will then send all emails other than client match emails via your own mail server, client match emails will still be sent by the ISSL server as that can handle bulk mail. This will allow you to control which email server sends emails from Standout to your contacts. Either leave this option or enable it to use your own email server. Your IT team should be able to provide you with email server details for Standout to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server Enabled                        ticked, this will allow configuration of your own Email Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email host name                     normally the smtp address (eg smtp.yourdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port number                           normally 465 or 587 (gmail etc is 587)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Protocol                                  Normally TLS but can be SSL or None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Username                               Username of the account (can be an email address)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Password                                Password for the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From name                             Text for the account (can be your Agency Name)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From address                          Email address of the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send test email                       Send a test email using the above settings (saving the agency is not required for testing, only to save permanently)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email branding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to upload images for an email header and footer, change colour schemes and when sending a property match email, enter additional text at the top of the email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Status Overrides ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Override.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to override a status on your website and portals. The main reason for this override is whilst a sale goes through, and has the possibility of falling though, allowing the agency to continue gathering potential customer details during the sale process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Privacy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Configure the amount of time to keep details on the system. This screen allows you to determine how long you will keep various forms of data. This decision is yours and any periods should be updated in line with your privacy policy and company terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Telephone privacy statement ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This statement will be displayed alongside a telephone consent checkbox on contact details, allowing it to be read out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recently introduced, by default, “Force GDPR conformation” has been added to Standout. This option will force the Marketing/Privacy/Manual consent option to be displayed when a member of staff adds a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An agency should place their own Telephone privacy statement in the above box. This will be displayed each time a staff member creates a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if you are entering a Solicitor, you can instruct your staff member to ignore this option and move left to the Contact details tab and enter the Solicitor details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data retention limits ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vendors ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Buyer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlords ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenants ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Marketing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Key ====&lt;br /&gt;
To allow you to email multiple contacts, the Marketing tab allows you to link Standout to MailChimp. All the details required are linked from this page to MailChimp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Lists ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of how lists are shown can be seen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File Storage.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will require you to subscribe to either FTP File Server, Dropbox or Google Drive for the storage of documents. These documents are used in both Letter and Email templates to send agency documents to your contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &#039;&#039;&#039;ISSL can offer 2Gb of free disk space, please contact us at support@issl.co.uk and we can set this up for you. Once you get to the limit, we offer cheaper rates than the other services.&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum size of each file you can upload is 10Mb. The maximum space is dictated by your storage provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please be aware, large files connected to an email may stop the contact from receiving your email if their email provider has a limit on the size of an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoices – currently unavailable ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout is linked to our accounting system, all invoices that have been issued to your agency can be viewed from this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tawk to API ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tawk To.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can show and link the Tawk To chat system so that if installed on your website, you can receive notifications that a client wishes to chat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you log into Tawk to then choose the icon on the left side which reads “Add ons”, choose Webhooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the “+Create Webhook” button and you will then need to copy the link given in the Tawk to settings and place it into “Your Request Endpoint URL” and then copy and paste the Secret Key into the Tawk To Settings, click Save to update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to amend each staff member and go to Permissions and tick the Permission “Use Tawk.To Interface” for them to be able to use Tawk to within Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the first Branch created is called Head Office (you can rename this). When in trial or Landlord mode, only one branch can be configured. Once signed up, an agency can add further branches.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Branch List.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new branch, the procedure is identical to the details in Edit Branch,.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit Branch ===&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a branch, just click the Edit Branch on the right hand side.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit Branch Button.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact Information ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch Name              the name of this Branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                     the postcode of this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                       the full address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                       the country where the branch resides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Telephone Number    the telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fax Number                the fax number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email address              the main email used for this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Latitude                       the Latitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longitude                    the Longitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set map                      move your branch latitude/longitude if does not display correctly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comp. Reg. No.          the Company Registration Number for your agency/branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legal entity name       the Legal entity name of this Agency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you’ve added all the staff in your Agency, you can assign those Staff members to Manager roles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default rooms ====&lt;br /&gt;
To optimise property entry, it Is possible to create default rooms and floors. These rooms/floors will appear (if chosen to be added) at the end of your floors/rooms within a property. One of the popular options for default rooms is to add Agent Notes and Disclaimers to a property and saves the re-entering of room information. Additionally, as with floors/rooms in a property, these can be excluded from being included in a brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Branch services =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch on hold           if you either close a branch or temporarily stop operating from a branch, this will place that branch on hold so no properties can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales                            this branch caters for Sale properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rentals                        this branch caters for Rental properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Auction                       this branch caters for Auction properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential                  this branch caters for Residential classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial                 this branch caters for Commercial classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business sales             this branch caters for Business sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicable countries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select which countries this branch deals with &#039;England&#039; is selected by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default local council =====&lt;br /&gt;
This dropdown selection will default to the default local council in the Agency settings. However, if this branch does not fall within this remit, you can then choose an alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Properties =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property status mode this allows all properties to either operate by Free or Guided (default) modes. In Free mode, you select the Property status as you progress through either the Sale or Rental. In Guided mode, the system will allow you to only choose from a chosen set of statuses and will change as you progress through the Sale or Rental process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Countries can be configured so that if you only operate in England, then you can choose Not displayed otherwise you can choose Displayed or Mandatory that a country is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable EPC is when you either wish to enter an EPC for a property but, if this is not an requirement, then EPCs can be turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Force money laundering checks will only allow you to proceed with a property only when those parties have supplied money laundering documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flag properties that have not been viewing in the past number of days allows you to set a number of days so that agents are aware of properties that are not gaining interest by potential buyers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Diary =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you wish to ensure that by default emails are sent to viewers, owners and tenants but can be either turned off here or when creating an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fees =====&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee                              the fee default amount (1% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee type                      either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee                   the rental fee default amount (0% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee type           either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default finders fee                  a monetary figure (£0.00 default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply fees                               when the agencies management feeds should be applied&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On due date                when the due date occurs, fees are raised automatically&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On payment                when the tenant pays, then the fees are raised&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Currency =====&lt;br /&gt;
An agency can set up all the agency fees that they accept, by default GBP/EUR/USD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letters =====&lt;br /&gt;
When letters are produced, who letters are sent from, either the Property Manager, Branch Manager or that user that is logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Language =====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can convert text to French/German/Spanish instead of English &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tax ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you enter your VAT number, Standout will allow you to enter the VAT rate and the effective Date, this will allow the system to calculate the correct VAT amount for each applicable transaction. If the rate changes, then Standout will use the current VAT rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rental ====&lt;br /&gt;
Rental fee information           the agencies legal information regarding rental properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will be displayed on your website and to portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repairs                                    If your website was created by ISSL recently, it may have the ability for tenants to report repairs directly. If this is available and enabled, the below staff member will be notified whenever a new repair is reported by a tenant, in addition to it appearing in the list of repairs for their property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SMS ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send SMS text messages to mobile numbers but, an Agency must purchase credits for this to operate. You will be required to enter an SMS sender number (usually your office number) and a tag line for the end of your message. Also, if enabled, Standout can text those contacts who are viewing a property, will receive a reminder 2 hours prior to an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advertising board request ====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has two methods for board companies, either the standard email service, or Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency Express =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Express.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you sign up with agency express you can obtain an API code from them, just put that (Copy and Paste) into the Agency Express API field, you will also get a Branch Code, again copy and paste that into the Branch code field and select the other options as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Standard Email Board Company ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Board Company.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board company contact details =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the required information primarily the board company email address where the automated emails will be sent to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale statuses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letting statuses =====&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board removal =====&lt;br /&gt;
When a board should be removed (after x days).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Applicable countries ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Applicable Countries.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default England is selected for all companies and offices, however you should ensure that this is selected correctly according to the countries that you sell properties in, just tick or untick as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affiliates ===&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can send the appropriate information to either Brief Your Market or Move with Us should you have a subscription with either of these companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proactive Actions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Proactive actions have been created to automate actions to improve efficiency of your agency. By setting up actions you are able to initiate reminders, communications with a property vendor or landlord without having to manually perform this. For example, you might want to send an email to a vendor after 7 days of their property going on the market to reassure them you&#039;re doing everything to find a buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Creating a new action&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - A description of the action (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable/Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this task is Disabled, it will not be processed by Standout (if you want to suspend this for the time being)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Residential/Commercial/Business&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose which class of property to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales/Lettings&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose if this action is to perform against a sales property or a rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;At status change/After status change&#039;&#039;&#039; - &amp;quot;At status change&amp;quot; will be processed every time a property is edited and those actions which are applicable, will be processed. &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; will be processed by a daily job that will run in the early hours of a morning. Therefore, when selecting a &amp;quot;Contact day&amp;quot; you will NOT be able to choose &amp;quot;Immediately&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Specific status&#039;&#039;&#039; - Which status do you want to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Method&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6 methods are currently available: &#039;Create a task&#039;, &#039;Diarise telephone call&#039;, &#039;Diarise send email&#039;, &#039;Diarise send SMS&#039;, &#039;Email (automated)&#039;, &#039;Email (staff member)&#039;, &#039;SMS (automated)&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact day&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to perform this action immediately or up to 28 days in the future. Note: Immediately will NOT be available if &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact time&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific time for the diary appointment to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Staff member&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to assign any the action to (be it an task/appointment or a signature on an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Send to&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to send the email or SMS to - Vendor/Landlord or Buyer/Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Task name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful task subject line when creating a task for a staff member (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Subject&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an email method is chosen, this appears for you to complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Body&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text to an email. Variables can also be used and are:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Current variables are&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Property variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{RE} - The Display Address for the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{REF} - The property reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{ADDRESS} - The properties full address (seperate lines)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Vendor variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSalutation} - The vendor name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTitle} - The title of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorName} - The first name(s) of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSurname} - The surname of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTelephone} - The vendors telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorMobile} - The vendors mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorEmail} - The vendors email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Landlord Variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSalutation} - The landlords name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTitle} - The title of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordName} - The first name(s) of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSurname} - The surname of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTelephone} - The landlords telelphone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordMobile} - The landlords mobile number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordEmail} - The landlords email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buyer variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSalutation} - The buyer name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTitle} - The title of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerName} - The first name(s) of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSurname} - The surname of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTelephone} - The buyers telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerMobile} - The buyers mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tenant variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSalutation} - The tenant name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTitle} - The title of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantName} - The first name(s) of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSurname} - The surname of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTelephone} - The tenants telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantMobile} - The tenants mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Staff variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{StaffMember} - The name of the staff member dealing with this property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{AgencyName} - The agency name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeAddres} - The address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeTelephone} - The telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeEmail} - The email address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Formatting variables&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{b} - Start to bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/b} - End of the bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{u} - Start to underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/u} - End of the underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{i} - Start to italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/i} - End of the italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Delete action&#039;&#039;&#039; - allows for you to delete the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039; - cancel editing the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create/Update action&#039;&#039;&#039; - creates or updates the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once saved, you will be shown a list of existing actions. You have the options to edit or delete an action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Money laundering provider ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 options for money laundering provider either none (you will do all the checks manually yourself) or [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark] where they will do all the checking for you.[[File:Money Laundering Provider.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If None is selected you have two options available Force money laundering checks, which basically reminds you if you have not entered any identity check information and email chase up, enabling this option will send reminder emails to those contacts that are still required to provide you with Money Laundering documentation. By enabling this option, a staff member is required to be selected and if required, the email can be amended to your own wording.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landmark AML ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Landmark will enable the fully automated Anti Money Laundering verification system from [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you sign up with Landmark tell them you are using Standout Property Manager From ISSL they will provide you with an Account ID, copy and past that into the Account ID field and save, from that point on your are able to automatically AML check contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default the staff list shows all staff that are enabled, you can change this list to show all inactive staff by clicking on the filter by status drop down, from here you can select active or inactive staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you want to restore a staff member that you have made inactive  swap to the inactive list, then click restore to the right of the person that you want to make active again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Restore User.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that if a member of staff leaves you deactivate them from the system as soon as they walk out the door for the protection of your data, as they can login from anywhere unless you have ip restrictions in place.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add / Edit a member of staff ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff Screen 1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Most fields here are self explanatory please remember if you have multiple offices to assign the staff member to the correct office with the correct privileges .Once completed  data entry of this tab, please press Create staff before moving to the next tab to ensure that there will be no data loss or entry errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Permissions ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 1.png|none|thumb|1131x1131px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 2.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 3.png|none|thumb|575x575px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can allow or disallow staff access to parts of the Standout system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The permissions screen is split into logical sections to help you assign the correct level of access to each person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click any of the above options, they will automatically update, therefore, you do not need to click Save staff on this tab once you have completed your edits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email Preferences ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this section to create an email signature for automated emails as you are legally obliged to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email access ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a staff’s email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a history of what a staff member has had logged whilst using Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Login locations ===&lt;br /&gt;
When staff log in, their IP address is recorded, if a member of staff is working out of the office and shouldn’t be, this will allow you to block the address in Agency / Security.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Holidays Administration Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configuring holidays is simple, there are the following two options in Administration/Staff/Staff member. Then, select the Permissions tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifically, these are the two settings that need to be configured, with ticks, that member of staff can do both, without those, are required to request holidays.&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration Warning===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no one has “Approve own holidays” in a branch, when a staff member attempts to Request a holiday, they will see this error:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To fix this issue ensure the above has been configured.&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
Within Staff details / Basic details, there is now the ability to store the staff members holiday allocation, this is in number of days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with their allocation, please enter their workdays so the system knows which days they work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teams ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teams.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above example screen shot shows the general team selected and all staff members are added to that team.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the General team is created and all staff members automatically get added to this team when they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a team click Edit then add or remove staff as required and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new team, enter the Team name, choose Staff and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Feeds.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to send data to various outbound data feeds to portals etc, and update the details for those you are subscribed to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of outbound data feed :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standard Feeds (Rightmove, On the Market, Zoopla etc) and None Standard feeds none standard feeds need extra information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All feeds are edited by simply clicking on the Edit button as per the below example :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Edit link is pressed it expands down to show the below :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices 2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill in the feed codes supplied by the portal company in the spaces provided, note you may have different codes for each type of property, also some types may not appear ie if you do not do commercial property then that option will not be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Automatically include new listings determines if any new property you enter is automatically sent to the portal, if not selected you need to manually enable the property to send on the advertising tab within each property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have input the code supplied, press Save Details and you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feed will automatically start. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second type of feed requiring more information is shown below, again the portal will supply the extra information.[[File:FTP Feeds.png|none|thumb|999x999px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Portal companies will supply you with their feed information, certain portals will require FTP details to be entered, others will already contain FTP settings, some using real time data feeds (Rightmove, Zoopla etc) do not need this information. Some portals will also have separate feed codes for each branch so ensure you check that the feeds are set up correctly as per the portal requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All portals will have feed codes for the types of properties that will be required to populate the above fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Security ==&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to define known IP addresses to restrict logins to this system. If no IP Addresses are listed, staff can log in from any machine. Adding IP Addresses to this list will restrict where staff can log in from, and increase the security of your data.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Security.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above screenshot shows that Carl Smit is only allowed to access Standout Property Manager from the ip address shown, this restricting this person to only login from the office (or any known location)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IP formatting:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV4 addresses follow the format N.N.N.N where N is a number from 1-255&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV6 addresses follow the example 2001:0db8:0a0b:12f0:0000:0000:0000:0001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property features ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Features.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to add new items that have not been defined in the “Features” list within Properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if you sell properties that quite often have canal at the rear of the garden then you could add a feature of &#039;Canal Mooring&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property Progression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add marker ==&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to add a progression marker that does not already exist and for a range of contracts/classes and contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact Sources ==&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has some default advertising sources configured. However, should you wish to record a specific advertising campaign or advertising outlet not listed, it can be added in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Brochure Templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
By default, Standout has two brochures available. However, these can be amended for your agency. ISSL offer a service to create a brochure for your agency (at a cost), otherwise, you may download a template, amend it and upload it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new brochure, click Duplicate on either of the above defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing a brochure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     a meaning full short description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a full description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a complete list of what variables to use within your brochure, click “Template variables available to use on this brochure” and a comprehensive list and descriptions will be show. If needed, copy/paste this information into a new Word document to either save as a reference and/or print out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Download Microsoft Word template” to download and edit the document. When completed, click on Choose File, select the template that you’ve edited and then click&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save Brochure. The original brochure will now be replaced with the new version. To test, open a property, click More Actions then Generate Brochure, if you then save the property with a generated brochure, Standout will create a PDF version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letter templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout offers a master set of letters when communicating with contacts. Every letter can be duplicated, amended and then used by Staff. We recommend letter names that are meaningful and not ambiguous, especially if duplicate letters are created with only minor differences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you’ve attached Agency files to be sent with your letters, the number of letters attached will be shown in the letter description “(and has ‘x’ agency file(s) attached)”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Master letters are available to preview and Duplicate but not Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a letter to that you wish to duplicate and click “Duplicate”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit letter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Copy settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a document already configured (with Page/Header/Footer settings, you can use this option to copy these. Click Copy settings from, select your letter and then click Copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful Letter name and description for this letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
These settings allow you to control the margins on the page and the default font size to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Header ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Letter content ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you configure the content of the letter and place the variables in your letter which will be converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Design Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the “Help on designing letter templates” a list of sections and variables should be displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is broken into three sections - Section variables, Mandatory variables, Optional variables (usually added variables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency files ===&lt;br /&gt;
Once files have been uploaded in the Agency files section, you are able to then choose files to be sent with these letters, should you choose the Email option and are attached automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once completed click on Save letter to save these changes and return to the Letters list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with Letters, emails have Master copies that you are unable to edit, to make your own version, click “Duplicate” to create a new document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing Email ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on Edit on the right hand side to open the template details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     the name of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a detailed description of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Template Code                       the wording of your email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show merge fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agency files                             the files that can be attached to an email sent from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete                                     Delete this template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cancel                                     Cancel any alterations and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save email                               Save the email and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diary categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to create new categories for the diary and also allows the category colour to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Match location updater ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Match Location Update.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to enter an area, then, if you believe it should be altered, you can then send a request to our support team for it to be inspected and either authorised or rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proposing a new location ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propose New Location.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Nearby location          if the location can’t be found, enter one that is nearby as a starting point and then amend as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name your location    Name the location of the area you are suggesting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propose location         click this button to send the location to support for their review.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Landmark Agency Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landmark should provide you with four configuration keys, these are to be stored in Administration / Branch / Money laundering configuration&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to input the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
API or Ocp Apim Subscription Key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered (or copy/pasted), then save the branch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to log out and log back into Standout for these settings to allow AML checking.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=630</id>
		<title>Contacts Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=630"/>
		<updated>2022-08-19T13:33:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Solicitor Address Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Contacts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact Details =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a new contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic details ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact type ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact MUST have at least one option selected:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Contact Type&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Applicant / Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy or rent a property.&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchaser&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy a property&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to market their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to rent out their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contractor&lt;br /&gt;
|A contractor that undertakes repairs&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact information ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address  – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               Example - me@me.com, you@you.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heat Rating ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;.   Think of an old fashioned Hot Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Solicitor Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitors in Standout are a special type of contact as you can have many solicitors working for a company, and to ensure data consistency we ensure that the company name is only listed once at a post code (you can have the same company in many towns so we limit to only one company name at the same address).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You then add each solicitor person to the main solicitor record by entering their name etc on the contact, then in the company name search box enter the correct company name and press search, it will then populate the address if the company name already exists. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other information is then entered as the above section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff notes and information ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Anti Money Laundering =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current ID details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Documents listed by default are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EEA member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           House or motor insurance certificate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council tax bill for the current year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Record of home visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current full UK driving licence (new style only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current Passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EE member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Firearms or shotgun certificates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           National identity card containing photograph of the client&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Identification reference (required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the identification reference of the document being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date Produced and photocopied (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Date on ID (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right to rent ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Requirements =&lt;br /&gt;
The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Match requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of each field is given below :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match name               a unique name for this requirement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build only            if they are interested in new build only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract type              For Sale / To Let&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Live matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Previously matched ==&lt;br /&gt;
When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Files =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Notes =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Viewings / Offers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Rental agreements =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Marketing / Privacy =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mailchimp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GDPR consent ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= History =&lt;br /&gt;
The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linked properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchasing Properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Searching Solicitors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Invoices =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark as Paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Solicitors – Solicitor details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= More actions =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The More actions sub menu for contacts offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create appointment&lt;br /&gt;
This option creates an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email. By default, Email Contact will be enabled in the Appointment form, this uses an email template located in Administration/Emails and is named &amp;quot;Contact appointment&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task&lt;br /&gt;
create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book a viewing&lt;br /&gt;
create a booking for the client to see a property&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=629</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sidebar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=629"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:20:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Welcome&lt;br /&gt;
** Standout - Quick Start|Quick Start&lt;br /&gt;
** Marketing_a_Property|Market a Property&lt;br /&gt;
* General Operation&lt;br /&gt;
** The_Dashboard|Dashboard&lt;br /&gt;
** Profile_Configuration|Staff Profile&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_Holidays|Staff Holidays&lt;br /&gt;
* Diary&lt;br /&gt;
** Diary_Overview|Diary Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Task_List|Task List&lt;br /&gt;
* Properties&lt;br /&gt;
** Property Overview|Property Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Adding_a_new_Rental_Property|Adding a new rental property&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_Property_Overview|Rental Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_HMO|HMO Rentals&lt;br /&gt;
** Bulk_Rental_Payments|Bulk Payments&lt;br /&gt;
** Landmark_Anti_Money_Laundering_Checking|Landmark AML&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_visits|Staff Visits&lt;br /&gt;
* Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
** Business_Sales|Business Sales Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Contacts Overview|Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Tenant_List|Tenant List&lt;br /&gt;
** Chase_Outstanding_Rent|Chase Outstanding Rent&lt;br /&gt;
** GDPR|GDPR&lt;br /&gt;
* Reports&lt;br /&gt;
** Overview|Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Administration|Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Brochure_Printing_Templates|Brochure Templates&lt;br /&gt;
** Agency_Express|Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
** Xero_Accounts_Setup|Xero Accounts Setup&lt;br /&gt;
** Xero_Accounts_Usage|Xero Accounts Usage&lt;br /&gt;
** Sage_Accounts_Setup|Sage Accounts Setup&lt;br /&gt;
** Sage_Accounts_Usage|Sage Accounts Usage&lt;br /&gt;
* System&lt;br /&gt;
** recentchanges-url|recentchanges&lt;br /&gt;
* SEARCH&lt;br /&gt;
* LANGUAGES&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=628</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=628"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:19:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts synchronisation&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Sage prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Sage email address, password and be successful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise Contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Sage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise rental invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise sales invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find any invoice that has been either partially or fully allocated in Sage, enter the Start date, End date or choose date ranges from the Date Helpers. Once you’ve chosen your date range, click the Search Sage button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will search for payments in Sage and once located, will update the invoice details within Standout. An email will be sent detailing which invoices have been synchronised.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=627</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=627"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:18:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Accounts synchronisation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts synchronisation&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Sage prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Sage email address, password and be successful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise Contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Sage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise rental invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise sales invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           To find any invoice that has been either partially or fully allocated in Sage, enter the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start date, End date or choose date ranges from the Date Helpers. Once you’ve chosen your date range, click the Search Sage button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will search for payments in Sage and once located, will update the invoice details within Standout. An email will be sent detailing which invoices have been synchronised.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=626</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=626"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:16:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Created page with &amp;quot;===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ===== Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administrati...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts synchronisation&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=625</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=625"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:16:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Configuring Xero for Standout Integration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Sage for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Sage needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Sage Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Sage for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Sage App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Sage (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Sage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Sage Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Sage Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=624</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=624"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:13:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Created page with &amp;quot;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration == Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration  ==== Chart of Accounts ====   In your chart of accounts, w...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=615</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=615"/>
		<updated>2022-03-21T09:08:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=614</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=614"/>
		<updated>2022-03-21T08:37:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts link&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Sync Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts and invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Rental chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&#039;&#039;&#039;Sales chart account codes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=613</id>
		<title>Contacts Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=613"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:30:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Solicitor Address Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Contacts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact Details =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a new contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic details ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact type ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact MUST have at least one option selected:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Contact Type&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Applicant / Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy or rent a property.&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchaser&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy a property&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to market their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to rent out their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contractor&lt;br /&gt;
|A contractor that undertakes repairs&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact information ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address  – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               Example - me@me.com, you@you.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heat Rating ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;.   Think of an old fashioned Hot Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Solicitor Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other information is then entered as the above section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff notes and information ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Anti Money Laundering =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current ID details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Documents listed by default are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EEA member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           House or motor insurance certificate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council tax bill for the current year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Record of home visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current full UK driving licence (new style only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current Passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EE member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Firearms or shotgun certificates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           National identity card containing photograph of the client&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Identification reference (required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the identification reference of the document being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date Produced and photocopied (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Date on ID (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right to rent ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Requirements =&lt;br /&gt;
The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Match requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of each field is given below :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match name               a unique name for this requirement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build only            if they are interested in new build only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract type              For Sale / To Let&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Live matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Previously matched ==&lt;br /&gt;
When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Files =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Notes =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Viewings / Offers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Rental agreements =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Marketing / Privacy =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mailchimp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GDPR consent ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= History =&lt;br /&gt;
The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linked properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchasing Properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Searching Solicitors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Invoices =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark as Paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Solicitors – Solicitor details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= More actions =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The More actions sub menu for contacts offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task               create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book a viewing            create a booking for the client to see a property&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=612</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=612"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:25:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Xero synchronisation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &#039;&#039;&#039;Accounts synchronisation&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  &#039;&#039;&#039;Xero synchronisation&#039;&#039;&#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=611</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=611"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:23:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch selection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== Accounts synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Xero synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>